// dear imgui, v1.89.9
// (widgets code)

/*

Index of this file:

// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Main (Button, Image, Checkbox, RadioButton, ProgressBar, Bullet, etc.)
// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers (Spacing, Dummy, NewLine, Separator, etc.)
// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers
// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
// [SECTION] Widgets: MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.

*/

#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
#endif

#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#endif

#include "imgui.h"
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
#include "imgui_internal.h"

// System includes
#include <stdint.h> // intptr_t

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Warnings
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Visual Studio warnings
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma warning(disable : 4127) // condition expression is constant
#pragma warning(disable : 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later
#pragma warning(disable : 5054) // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types
#endif
#pragma warning(disable : 26451) // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte
                                 // value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2).
#pragma warning(disable : 26812) // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3).
#endif

// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
#if defined(__clang__)
#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored                                                                                                                               \
    "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'                      // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to
                               // be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great!
#endif
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning: use of old-style cast                            // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored                                                                                                                               \
    "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format string is not a string literal            // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes,
                                                       // user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored                                                                                                                               \
    "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning: zero as null pointer constant                    // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using
                                                      // printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wenum-enum-conversion" // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_')
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored                                                                                                                               \
    "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion" // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial
                                                   // copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored                                                                                                                                 \
    "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion" // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated
#endif

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Data
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Widgets
static const float DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER =
    0.70f; // Time for drag-hold to activate items accepting the ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold button behavior.
static const float DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR =
    0.50f; // Multiplier for the default value of io.MouseDragThreshold to make DragFloat/DragInt react faster to mouse drags.

// Those MIN/MAX values are not define because we need to point to them
static const signed char IM_S8_MIN = -128;
static const signed char IM_S8_MAX = 127;
static const unsigned char IM_U8_MIN = 0;
static const unsigned char IM_U8_MAX = 0xFF;
static const signed short IM_S16_MIN = -32768;
static const signed short IM_S16_MAX = 32767;
static const unsigned short IM_U16_MIN = 0;
static const unsigned short IM_U16_MAX = 0xFFFF;
static const ImS32 IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN; // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000);
static const ImS32 IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX; // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF)
static const ImU32 IM_U32_MIN = 0;
static const ImU32 IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFF)
#ifdef LLONG_MIN
static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN; // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll);
static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX; // (9223372036854775807ll);
#else
static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
#endif
static const ImU64 IM_U64_MIN = 0;
#ifdef ULLONG_MAX
static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull);
#else
static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
#endif

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// For InputTextEx()
static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(ImGuiContext *ctx,
                                     unsigned int *p_char,
                                     ImGuiInputTextFlags flags,
                                     ImGuiInputTextCallback callback,
                                     void *user_data,
                                     ImGuiInputSource input_source);
static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char *text_begin, const char **out_text_end);
static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImGuiContext *ctx,
                                     const ImWchar *text_begin,
                                     const ImWchar *text_end,
                                     const ImWchar **remaining = NULL,
                                     ImVec2 *out_offset = NULL,
                                     bool stop_on_new_line = false);

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TextEx() [Internal]
// - TextUnformatted()
// - Text()
// - TextV()
// - TextColored()
// - TextColoredV()
// - TextDisabled()
// - TextDisabledV()
// - TextWrapped()
// - TextWrappedV()
// - LabelText()
// - LabelTextV()
// - BulletText()
// - BulletTextV()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::TextEx(const char *text, const char *text_end, ImGuiTextFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;

    // Accept null ranges
    if (text == text_end)
        text = text_end = "";

    // Calculate length
    const char *text_begin = text;
    if (text_end == NULL)
        text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT

    const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
    const float wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos;
    const bool wrap_enabled = (wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f);
    if (text_end - text <= 2000 || wrap_enabled) {
        // Common case
        const float wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f;
        const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width);

        ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
        ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f);
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
            return;

        // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function)
        RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width);
    } else {
        // Long text!
        // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text
        // - From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled.
        // - We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item
        // on the line.
        // - We use memchr(), pay attention that well optimized versions of those str/mem functions are much faster than a casually written loop.
        const char *line = text;
        const float line_height = GetTextLineHeight();
        ImVec2 text_size(0, 0);

        // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text)
        ImVec2 pos = text_pos;
        if (!g.LogEnabled) {
            int lines_skippable = (int)((window->ClipRect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height);
            if (lines_skippable > 0) {
                int lines_skipped = 0;
                while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable) {
                    const char *line_end = (const char *)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                    if (!line_end)
                        line_end = text_end;
                    if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
                        text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                    line = line_end + 1;
                    lines_skipped++;
                }
                pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
            }
        }

        // Lines to render
        if (line < text_end) {
            ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height));
            while (line < text_end) {
                if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0))
                    break;

                const char *line_end = (const char *)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                if (!line_end)
                    line_end = text_end;
                text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false);
                line = line_end + 1;
                line_rect.Min.y += line_height;
                line_rect.Max.y += line_height;
                pos.y += line_height;
            }

            // Count remaining lines
            int lines_skipped = 0;
            while (line < text_end) {
                const char *line_end = (const char *)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                if (!line_end)
                    line_end = text_end;
                if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
                    text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                line = line_end + 1;
                lines_skipped++;
            }
            pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
        }
        text_size.y = (pos - text_pos).y;

        ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
        ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f);
        ItemAdd(bb, 0);
    }
}

void ImGui::TextUnformatted(const char *text, const char *text_end)
{
    TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
}

void ImGui::Text(const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextV(const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    const char *text, *text_end;
    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&text, &text_end, fmt, args);
    TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
}

void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4 &col, const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextColoredV(col, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4 &col, const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    PopStyleColor();
}

void ImGui::TextDisabled(const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextDisabledV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextDisabledV(const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    PopStyleColor();
}

void ImGui::TextWrapped(const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextWrappedV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextWrappedV(const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const bool need_backup = (g.CurrentWindow->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f); // Keep existing wrap position if one is already set
    if (need_backup)
        PushTextWrapPos(0.0f);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    if (need_backup)
        PopTextWrapPos();
}

void ImGui::LabelText(const char *label, const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    LabelTextV(label, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets
void ImGui::LabelTextV(const char *label, const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const char *value_text_begin, *value_text_end;
    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&value_text_begin, &value_text_end, fmt, args);
    const ImVec2 value_size = CalcTextSize(value_text_begin, value_text_end, false);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect value_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(w, value_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2));
    const ImRect total_bb(
        pos,
        pos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), ImMax(value_size.y, label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y * 2));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, &value_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
}

void ImGui::BulletText(const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    BulletTextV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node.
void ImGui::BulletTextV(const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    const char *text_begin, *text_end;
    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&text_begin, &text_end, fmt, args);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false);
    const ImVec2 total_size =
        ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2) : 0.0f), label_size.y); // Empty text doesn't add padding
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
    ItemSize(total_size, 0.0f);
    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + total_size);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize * 0.5f, g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
    RenderText(bb.Min + ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x * 2, 0.0f), text_begin, text_end, false);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Main
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ButtonBehavior() [Internal]
// - Button()
// - SmallButton()
// - InvisibleButton()
// - ArrowButton()
// - CloseButton() [Internal]
// - CollapseButton() [Internal]
// - GetWindowScrollbarID() [Internal]
// - GetWindowScrollbarRect() [Internal]
// - Scrollbar() [Internal]
// - ScrollbarEx() [Internal]
// - Image()
// - ImageButton()
// - Checkbox()
// - CheckboxFlagsT() [Internal]
// - CheckboxFlags()
// - RadioButton()
// - ProgressBar()
// - Bullet()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// The ButtonBehavior() function is key to many interactions and used by many/most widgets.
// Because we handle so many cases (keyboard/gamepad navigation, drag and drop) and many specific behavior (via ImGuiButtonFlags_),
// this code is a little complex.
// By far the most common path is interacting with the Mouse using the default ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease button behavior.
// See the series of events below and the corresponding state reported by dear imgui:
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnClickRelease:             return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+0 (mouse is outside bb)        -             -                -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+1 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+4 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+5 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+8 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnClick:                    return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnRelease:                  return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnDoubleClick:              return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
//   Frame N+1 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+4 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+5 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Note that some combinations are supported,
// - PressedOnDragDropHold can generally be associated with any flag.
// - PressedOnDoubleClick can be associated by PressedOnClickRelease/PressedOnRelease, in which case the second release event won't be reported.
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// The behavior of the return-value changes when ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat is set:
//                                         Repeat+                  Repeat+           Repeat+             Repeat+
//                                         PressedOnClickRelease    PressedOnClick    PressedOnRelease    PressedOnDoubleClick
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -                        true              -                   true
//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
//   Frame N + RepeatDelay                  true                     true              -                   true
//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
//   Frame N + RepeatDelay + RepeatRate*N   true                     true              -                   true
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect &bb, ImGuiID id, bool *out_hovered, bool *out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();

    // Default only reacts to left mouse button
    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_;

    // Default behavior requires click + release inside bounding box
    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDefault_;

    // Default behavior inherited from item flags
    // Note that _both_ ButtonFlags and ItemFlags are valid sources, so copy one into the item_flags and only check that.
    ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = (g.LastItemData.ID == id ? g.LastItemData.InFlags : g.CurrentItemFlags);
    if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap)
        item_flags |= ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap;
    if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat)
        item_flags |= ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat;

    ImGuiWindow *backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow;
    const bool flatten_hovered_children = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredWindow && g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow == window;
    if (flatten_hovered_children)
        g.HoveredWindow = window;

#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
    // Alternate registration spot, for when caller didn't use ItemAdd()
    if (id != 0 && g.LastItemData.ID != id)
        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(id, bb, NULL);
#endif

    bool pressed = false;
    bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id, item_flags);

    // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button
    if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers))
        if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem)) {
            hovered = true;
            SetHoveredID(id);
            if (g.HoveredIdTimer - g.IO.DeltaTime <= DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER && g.HoveredIdTimer >= DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER) {
                pressed = true;
                g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId = id;
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
        }

    if (flatten_hovered_children)
        g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window;

    // Mouse handling
    const ImGuiID test_owner_id = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoTestKeyOwner) ? ImGuiKeyOwner_Any : id;
    if (hovered) {
        // Poll mouse buttons
        // - 'mouse_button_clicked' is generally carried into ActiveIdMouseButton when setting ActiveId.
        // - Technically we only need some values in one code path, but since this is gated by hovered test this is fine.
        int mouse_button_clicked = -1;
        int mouse_button_released = -1;
        for (int button = 0; button < 3; button++)
            if (flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft << button)) // Handle ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight and ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle here.
            {
                if (IsMouseClicked(button, test_owner_id) && mouse_button_clicked == -1) {
                    mouse_button_clicked = button;
                }
                if (IsMouseReleased(button, test_owner_id) && mouse_button_released == -1) {
                    mouse_button_released = button;
                }
            }

        // Process initial action
        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt)) {
            if (mouse_button_clicked != -1 && g.ActiveId != id) {
                if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoSetKeyOwner))
                    SetKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(mouse_button_clicked), id);
                if (flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere)) {
                    SetActiveID(id, window);
                    g.ActiveIdMouseButton = mouse_button_clicked;
                    if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                        SetFocusID(id, window);
                    FocusWindow(window);
                }
                if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick)
                    || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[mouse_button_clicked] == 2)) {
                    pressed = true;
                    if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId)
                        ClearActiveID();
                    else
                        SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID
                    if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                        SetFocusID(id, window);
                    g.ActiveIdMouseButton = mouse_button_clicked;
                    FocusWindow(window);
                }
            }
            if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease) {
                if (mouse_button_released != -1) {
                    const bool has_repeated_at_least_once = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
                        && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[mouse_button_released] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps on release behavior
                    if (!has_repeated_at_least_once)
                        pressed = true;
                    if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                        SetFocusID(id, window);
                    ClearActiveID();
                }
            }

            // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above).
            // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings.
            if (g.ActiveId == id && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat))
                if (g.IO.MouseDownDuration[g.ActiveIdMouseButton] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(g.ActiveIdMouseButton, test_owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat))
                    pressed = true;
        }

        if (pressed)
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
    }

    // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
    // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse.
    if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId))
        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnFocus))
            hovered = true;
    if (g.NavActivateDownId == id) {
        bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id);
        bool nav_activated_by_inputs = (g.NavActivatePressedId == id);
        if (!nav_activated_by_inputs && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)) {
            // Avoid pressing multiple keys from triggering excessive amount of repeat events
            const ImGuiKeyData *key1 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_Space);
            const ImGuiKeyData *key2 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_Enter);
            const ImGuiKeyData *key3 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate);
            const float t1 = ImMax(ImMax(key1->DownDuration, key2->DownDuration), key3->DownDuration);
            nav_activated_by_inputs = CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t1 - g.IO.DeltaTime, t1, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0;
        }
        if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs) {
            // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button.
            pressed = true;
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            g.ActiveIdSource = g.NavInputSource;
            if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                SetFocusID(id, window);
        }
    }

    // Process while held
    bool held = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id) {
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse) {
            if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
                g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min;

            const int mouse_button = g.ActiveIdMouseButton;
            if (mouse_button == -1) {
                // Fallback for the rare situation were g.ActiveId was set programmatically or from another widget (e.g. #6304).
                ClearActiveID();
            } else if (IsMouseDown(mouse_button, test_owner_id)) {
                held = true;
            } else {
                bool release_in = hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) != 0;
                bool release_anywhere = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere) != 0;
                if ((release_in || release_anywhere) && !g.DragDropActive) {
                    // Report as pressed when releasing the mouse (this is the most common path)
                    bool is_double_click_release =
                        (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseReleased[mouse_button] && g.IO.MouseClickedLastCount[mouse_button] == 2;
                    bool is_repeating_already = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
                        && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[mouse_button] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
                    bool is_button_avail_or_owned = TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(mouse_button), test_owner_id);
                    if (!is_double_click_release && !is_repeating_already && is_button_avail_or_owned)
                        pressed = true;
                }
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
        } else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) {
            // When activated using Nav, we hold on the ActiveID until activation button is released
            if (g.NavActivateDownId != id)
                ClearActiveID();
        }
        if (pressed)
            g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = true;
    }

    if (out_hovered)
        *out_hovered = hovered;
    if (out_held)
        *out_held = held;

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ButtonEx(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine)
        && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline
                                                                     // matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag)
        pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y;
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);

    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);

    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogSetNextTextDecoration("[", "]");
    RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb);

    // Automatically close popups
    // if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
    //    CloseCurrentPopup();

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Button(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size_arg)
{
    return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
}

// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing.
bool ImGui::SmallButton(const char *label)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y;
    g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f;
    bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine);
    g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y;
    return pressed;
}

// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack.
// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id)
bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(const char *str_id, const ImVec2 &size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    // Cannot use zero-size for InvisibleButton(). Unlike Button() there is not way to fallback using the label size.
    IM_ASSERT(size_arg.x != 0.0f && size_arg.y != 0.0f);

    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(size);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, str_id, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(const char *str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    ItemSize(size, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : -1.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, bg_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
    RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, (size.x - g.FontSize) * 0.5f), ImMax(0.0f, (size.y - g.FontSize) * 0.5f)), text_col, dir);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, str_id, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ArrowButton(const char *str_id, ImGuiDir dir)
{
    float sz = GetFrameHeight();
    return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
}

// Button to close a window
bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2 &pos)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // Tweak 1: Shrink hit-testing area if button covers an abnormally large proportion of the visible region. That's in order to facilitate moving the window
    // away. (#3825) This may better be applied as a general hit-rect reduction mechanism for all widgets to ensure the area to move window is always
    // accessible?
    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize));
    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
    const float area_to_visible_ratio = window->OuterRectClipped.GetArea() / bb.GetArea();
    if (area_to_visible_ratio < 1.5f)
        bb_interact.Expand(ImFloor(bb_interact.GetSize() * -0.25f));

    // Tweak 2: We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Activate sequence can always close a window.
    // (this isn't the common behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user because navigation tends to keep items visible in scrolling layer).
    bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb_interact, id);

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (is_clipped)
        return pressed;

    // Render
    // FIXME: Clarify this mess
    ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered);
    ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
    if (hovered)
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f), col);

    float cross_extent = g.FontSize * 0.5f * 0.7071f - 1.0f;
    ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent, +cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent, -cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent, -cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent, +cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2 &pos)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;

    ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize));
    bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb, id);
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
    if (is_clipped)
        return pressed;

    // Render
    ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    if (hovered || held)
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(bb.GetCenter() + ImVec2(0.0f, -0.5f), g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f, bg_col);
    RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min, text_col, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);

    // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
    if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging(0))
        StartMouseMovingWindow(window);

    return pressed;
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow *window, ImGuiAxis axis)
{
    return window->GetID(axis == ImGuiAxis_X ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");
}

// Return scrollbar rectangle, must only be called for corresponding axis if window->ScrollbarX/Y is set.
ImRect ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarRect(ImGuiWindow *window, ImGuiAxis axis)
{
    const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect();
    const ImRect inner_rect = window->InnerRect;
    const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
    const float scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis ^ 1]; // (ScrollbarSizes.x = width of Y scrollbar; ScrollbarSizes.y = height of X scrollbar)
    IM_ASSERT(scrollbar_size > 0.0f);
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
        return ImRect(inner_rect.Min.x,
                      ImMax(outer_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.y - border_size - scrollbar_size),
                      inner_rect.Max.x - border_size,
                      outer_rect.Max.y - border_size);
    else
        return ImRect(ImMax(outer_rect.Min.x, outer_rect.Max.x - border_size - scrollbar_size),
                      inner_rect.Min.y,
                      outer_rect.Max.x - border_size,
                      inner_rect.Max.y - border_size);
}

void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis axis)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    const ImGuiID id = GetWindowScrollbarID(window, axis);

    // Calculate scrollbar bounding box
    ImRect bb = GetWindowScrollbarRect(window, axis);
    ImDrawFlags rounding_corners = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone;
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) {
        rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft;
        if (!window->ScrollbarY)
            rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight;
    } else {
        if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
            rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight;
        if (!window->ScrollbarX)
            rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight;
    }
    float size_avail = window->InnerRect.Max[axis] - window->InnerRect.Min[axis];
    float size_contents = window->ContentSize[axis] + window->WindowPadding[axis] * 2.0f;
    ImS64 scroll = (ImS64)window->Scroll[axis];
    ScrollbarEx(bb, id, axis, &scroll, (ImS64)size_avail, (ImS64)size_contents, rounding_corners);
    window->Scroll[axis] = (float)scroll;
}

// Vertical/Horizontal scrollbar
// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
// Still, the code should probably be made simpler..
bool ImGui::ScrollbarEx(const ImRect &bb_frame, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, ImS64 *p_scroll_v, ImS64 size_avail_v, ImS64 size_contents_v, ImDrawFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const float bb_frame_width = bb_frame.GetWidth();
    const float bb_frame_height = bb_frame.GetHeight();
    if (bb_frame_width <= 0.0f || bb_frame_height <= 0.0f)
        return false;

    // When we are too small, start hiding and disabling the grab (this reduce visual noise on very small window and facilitate using the window resize grab)
    float alpha = 1.0f;
    if ((axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) && bb_frame_height < g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)
        alpha = ImSaturate((bb_frame_height - g.FontSize) / (g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    if (alpha <= 0.0f)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const bool allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f);

    ImRect bb = bb_frame;
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));

    // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
    const float scrollbar_size_v = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();

    // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
    // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
    IM_ASSERT(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v)
              > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
    const ImS64 win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v), (ImS64)1);
    const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * ((float)size_avail_v / (float)win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
    const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;

    // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
    bool held = false;
    bool hovered = false;
    ItemAdd(bb_frame, id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav);
    ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);

    const ImS64 scroll_max = ImMax((ImS64)1, size_contents_v - size_avail_v);
    float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate((float)*p_scroll_v / (float)scroll_max);
    float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v; // Grab position in normalized space
    if (held && allow_interaction && grab_h_norm < 1.0f) {
        const float scrollbar_pos_v = bb.Min[axis];
        const float mouse_pos_v = g.IO.MousePos[axis];

        // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
        const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
        SetHoveredID(id);

        bool seek_absolute = false;
        if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) {
            // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
            seek_absolute = (clicked_v_norm < grab_v_norm || clicked_v_norm > grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm);
            if (seek_absolute)
                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f;
            else
                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
        }

        // Apply scroll (p_scroll_v will generally point on one member of window->Scroll)
        // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of ContentSize and before setting up our starting
        // position
        const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter - grab_h_norm * 0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
        *p_scroll_v = (ImS64)(scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);

        // Update values for rendering
        scroll_ratio = ImSaturate((float)*p_scroll_v / (float)scroll_max);
        grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;

        // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
        if (seek_absolute)
            g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
    }

    // Render
    const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg);
    const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, alpha);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_frame.Min, bb_frame.Max, bg_col, window->WindowRounding, flags);
    ImRect grab_rect;
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
        grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, bb.Max.y);
    else
        grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);

    return held;
}

void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2 &size, const ImVec2 &uv0, const ImVec2 &uv1, const ImVec4 &tint_col, const ImVec4 &border_col)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
        bb.Max += ImVec2(2, 2);
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    if (border_col.w > 0.0f) {
        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f);
        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min + ImVec2(1, 1), bb.Max - ImVec2(1, 1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
    } else {
        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
    }
}

// ImageButton() is flawed as 'id' is always derived from 'texture_id' (see #2464 #1390)
// We provide this internal helper to write your own variant while we figure out how to redesign the public ImageButton() API.
bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id,
                          ImTextureID texture_id,
                          const ImVec2 &size,
                          const ImVec2 &uv0,
                          const ImVec2 &uv1,
                          const ImVec4 &bg_col,
                          const ImVec4 &tint_col,
                          ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImVec2 padding = g.Style.FramePadding;
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2.0f);
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, g.Style.FrameRounding));
    if (bg_col.w > 0.0f)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min + padding, bb.Max - padding, GetColorU32(bg_col));
    window->DrawList->AddImage(texture_id, bb.Min + padding, bb.Max - padding, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ImageButton(const char *str_id,
                        ImTextureID user_texture_id,
                        const ImVec2 &size,
                        const ImVec2 &uv0,
                        const ImVec2 &uv1,
                        const ImVec4 &bg_col,
                        const ImVec4 &tint_col)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return ImageButtonEx(window->GetID(str_id), user_texture_id, size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col);
}

#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
// Legacy API obsoleted in 1.89. Two differences with new ImageButton()
// - new ImageButton() requires an explicit 'const char* str_id'    Old ImageButton() used opaque imTextureId (created issue with: multiple buttons with same
// image, transient texture id values, opaque computation of ID)
// - new ImageButton() always use style.FramePadding                Old ImageButton() had an override argument.
// If you need to change padding with new ImageButton() you can use PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, value), consistent with other Button functions.
bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id,
                        const ImVec2 &size,
                        const ImVec2 &uv0,
                        const ImVec2 &uv1,
                        int frame_padding,
                        const ImVec4 &bg_col,
                        const ImVec4 &tint_col)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes.
    PushID((void *)(intptr_t)user_texture_id);
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image");
    PopID();

    if (frame_padding >= 0)
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding));
    bool ret = ImageButtonEx(id, user_texture_id, size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col);
    if (frame_padding >= 0)
        PopStyleVar();
    return ret;
}
#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS

bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char *label, bool *v)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect total_bb(
        pos,
        pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id)) {
        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
        return false;
    }

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (pressed) {
        *v = !(*v);
        MarkItemEdited(id);
    }

    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(check_bb.Min,
                check_bb.Max,
                GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive
                                : hovered     ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered
                                              : ImGuiCol_FrameBg),
                true,
                style.FrameRounding);
    ImU32 check_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark);
    bool mixed_value = (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue) != 0;
    if (mixed_value) {
        // Undocumented tristate/mixed/indeterminate checkbox (#2644)
        // This may seem awkwardly designed because the aim is to make ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue supported by all widgets (not just checkbox)
        ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)));
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + pad, check_bb.Max - pad, check_col, style.FrameRounding);
    } else if (*v) {
        const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
        RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList, check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_col, square_sz - pad * 2.0f);
    }

    ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y);
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&label_pos, mixed_value ? "[~]" : *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]");
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(label_pos, label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
    return pressed;
}

template<typename T>
bool ImGui::CheckboxFlagsT(const char *label, T *flags, T flags_value)
{
    bool all_on = (*flags & flags_value) == flags_value;
    bool any_on = (*flags & flags_value) != 0;
    bool pressed;
    if (!all_on && any_on) {
        ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
        g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue;
        pressed = Checkbox(label, &all_on);
    } else {
        pressed = Checkbox(label, &all_on);
    }
    if (pressed) {
        if (all_on)
            *flags |= flags_value;
        else
            *flags &= ~flags_value;
    }
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char *label, int *flags, int flags_value)
{
    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
}

bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char *label, unsigned int *flags, unsigned int flags_value)
{
    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
}

bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char *label, ImS64 *flags, ImS64 flags_value)
{
    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
}

bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char *label, ImU64 *flags, ImU64 flags_value)
{
    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
}

bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char *label, bool active)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
    const ImRect total_bb(
        pos,
        pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
        return false;

    ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter();
    center.x = IM_ROUND(center.x);
    center.y = IM_ROUND(center.y);
    const float radius = (square_sz - 1.0f) * 0.5f;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
    const int num_segment = window->DrawList->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(radius);
    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center,
                                      radius,
                                      GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive
                                                      : hovered     ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered
                                                                    : ImGuiCol_FrameBg),
                                      num_segment);
    if (active) {
        const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark));
    }

    if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f) {
        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center + ImVec2(1, 1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), num_segment, style.FrameBorderSize);
        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), num_segment, style.FrameBorderSize);
    }

    ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y);
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&label_pos, active ? "(x)" : "( )");
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(label_pos, label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
    return pressed;
}

// FIXME: This would work nicely if it was a public template, e.g. 'template<T> RadioButton(const char* label, T* v, T v_button)', but I'm not sure how we would
// expose it..
bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char *label, int *v, int v_button)
{
    const bool pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button);
    if (pressed)
        *v = v_button;
    return pressed;
}

// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size
void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2 &size_arg, const char *overlay)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    fraction = ImSaturate(fraction);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize));
    const ImVec2 fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y);
    RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding);

    // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it
    char overlay_buf[32];
    if (!overlay) {
        ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction * 100 + 0.01f);
        overlay = overlay_buf;
    }

    ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL);
    if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y),
                          bb.Max,
                          overlay,
                          NULL,
                          &overlay_size,
                          ImVec2(0.0f, 0.5f),
                          &bb);
}

void ImGui::Bullet()
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), g.FontSize);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height));
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) {
        SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2);
        return;
    }

    // Render and stay on same line
    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize * 0.5f, line_height * 0.5f), text_col);
    SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Spacing()
// - Dummy()
// - NewLine()
// - AlignTextToFramePadding()
// - SeparatorEx() [Internal]
// - Separator()
// - SplitterBehavior() [Internal]
// - ShrinkWidths() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::Spacing()
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ItemSize(ImVec2(0, 0));
}

void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2 &size)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(size);
    ItemAdd(bb, 0);
}

void ImGui::NewLine()
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
    if (window->DC.CurrLineSize.y > 0.0f) // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0, 0));
    else
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
    window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
}

void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
}

// Horizontal/vertical separating line
// FIXME: Surprisingly, this seemingly trivial widget is a victim of many different legacy/tricky layout issues.
// Note how thickness == 1.0f is handled specifically as not moving CursorPos by 'thickness', but other values are.
void ImGui::SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags, float thickness)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical))); // Check that only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(thickness > 0.0f);

    if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical) {
        // Vertical separator, for menu bars (use current line height).
        float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
        float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y;
        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + thickness, y2));
        ItemSize(ImVec2(thickness, 0.0f));
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
            return;

        // Draw
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogText(" |");
    } else if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal) {
        // Horizontal Separator
        float x1 = window->Pos.x;
        float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;

        // FIXME-WORKRECT: old hack (#205) until we decide of consistent behavior with WorkRect/Indent and Separator
        if (g.GroupStack.Size > 0 && g.GroupStack.back().WindowID == window->ID)
            x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;

        // FIXME-WORKRECT: In theory we should simply be using WorkRect.Min.x/Max.x everywhere but it isn't aesthetically what we want,
        // need to introduce a variant of WorkRect for that purpose. (#4787)
        if (ImGuiTable *table = g.CurrentTable) {
            x1 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MinX;
            x2 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MaxX;
        }

        // Before Tables API happened, we relied on Separator() to span all columns of a Columns() set.
        // We currently don't need to provide the same feature for tables because tables naturally have border features.
        ImGuiOldColumns *columns = (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? window->DC.CurrentColumns : NULL;
        if (columns)
            PushColumnsBackground();

        // We don't provide our width to the layout so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit
        // FIXME: This prevents ->CursorMaxPos based bounding box evaluation from working (e.g. TableEndCell)
        const float thickness_for_layout = (thickness == 1.0f)
            ? 0.0f
            : thickness; // FIXME: See 1.70/1.71 Separator() change: makes legacy 1-px separator not affect layout yet. Should change.
        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y + thickness));
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, thickness_for_layout));

        if (ItemAdd(bb, 0)) {
            // Draw
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
            if (g.LogEnabled)
                LogRenderedText(&bb.Min, "--------------------------------\n");
        }
        if (columns) {
            PopColumnsBackground();
            columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
        }
    }
}

void ImGui::Separator()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    // Those flags should eventually be configurable by the user
    // FIXME: We cannot g.Style.SeparatorTextBorderSize for thickness as it relates to SeparatorText() which is a decorated separator, not defaulting to 1.0f.
    ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
    flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns; // NB: this only applies to legacy Columns() api as they relied on Separator() a lot.
    SeparatorEx(flags, 1.0f);
}

void ImGui::SeparatorTextEx(ImGuiID id, const char *label, const char *label_end, float extra_w)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImVec2 padding = style.SeparatorTextPadding;

    const float separator_thickness = style.SeparatorTextBorderSize;
    const ImVec2 min_size(label_size.x + extra_w + padding.x * 2.0f, ImMax(label_size.y + padding.y * 2.0f, separator_thickness));
    const ImRect bb(pos, ImVec2(window->WorkRect.Max.x, pos.y + min_size.y));
    const float text_baseline_y = ImFloor((bb.GetHeight() - label_size.y) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.y
                                          + 0.99999f); // ImMax(padding.y, ImFloor((style.SeparatorTextSize - label_size.y) * 0.5f));
    ItemSize(min_size, text_baseline_y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return;

    const float sep1_x1 = pos.x;
    const float sep2_x2 = bb.Max.x;
    const float seps_y = ImFloor((bb.Min.y + bb.Max.y) * 0.5f + 0.99999f);

    const float label_avail_w = ImMax(0.0f, sep2_x2 - sep1_x1 - padding.x * 2.0f);
    const ImVec2 label_pos(pos.x + padding.x + ImMax(0.0f, (label_avail_w - label_size.x - extra_w) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.x),
                           pos.y + text_baseline_y); // FIXME-ALIGN

    // This allows using SameLine() to position something in the 'extra_w'
    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x = label_pos.x + label_size.x;

    const ImU32 separator_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator);
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f) {
        const float sep1_x2 = label_pos.x - style.ItemSpacing.x;
        const float sep2_x1 = label_pos.x + label_size.x + extra_w + style.ItemSpacing.x;
        if (sep1_x2 > sep1_x1 && separator_thickness > 0.0f)
            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(sep1_x1, seps_y), ImVec2(sep1_x2, seps_y), separator_col, separator_thickness);
        if (sep2_x2 > sep2_x1 && separator_thickness > 0.0f)
            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(sep2_x1, seps_y), ImVec2(sep2_x2, seps_y), separator_col, separator_thickness);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogSetNextTextDecoration("---", NULL);
        RenderTextEllipsis(window->DrawList, label_pos, ImVec2(bb.Max.x, bb.Max.y + style.ItemSpacing.y), bb.Max.x, bb.Max.x, label, label_end, &label_size);
    } else {
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogText("---");
        if (separator_thickness > 0.0f)
            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(sep1_x1, seps_y), ImVec2(sep2_x2, seps_y), separator_col, separator_thickness);
    }
}

void ImGui::SeparatorText(const char *label)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    // The SeparatorText() vs SeparatorTextEx() distinction is designed to be considerate that we may want:
    // - allow separator-text to be draggable items (would require a stable ID + a noticeable highlight)
    // - this high-level entry point to allow formatting? (which in turns may require ID separate from formatted string)
    // - because of this we probably can't turn 'const char* label' into 'const char* fmt, ...'
    // Otherwise, we can decide that users wanting to drag this would layout a dedicated drag-item,
    // and then we can turn this into a format function.
    SeparatorTextEx(0, label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label), 0.0f);
}

// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect &bb,
                             ImGuiID id,
                             ImGuiAxis axis,
                             float *size1,
                             float *size2,
                             float min_size1,
                             float min_size2,
                             float hover_extend,
                             float hover_visibility_delay,
                             ImU32 bg_col)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;

    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav))
        return false;

    // FIXME: AFAIK the only leftover reason for passing ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap here is
    // to allow caller of SplitterBehavior() to call SetItemAllowOverlap() after the item.
    // Nowadays we would instead want to use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() before the item.
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren;
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
    button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap;
#endif

    bool hovered, held;
    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
    bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
    ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (hovered)
        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect; // for IsItemHovered(), because bb_interact is larger than bb

    if (held || (hovered && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
        SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);

    ImRect bb_render = bb;
    if (held) {
        ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
        float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;

        // Minimum pane size
        float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
        float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2);
        if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta;
        if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta;

        // Apply resize
        if (mouse_delta != 0.0f) {
            if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
            if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
            *size1 += mouse_delta;
            *size2 -= mouse_delta;
            bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
            MarkItemEdited(id);
        }
    }

    // Render at new position
    if (bg_col & IM_COL32_A_MASK)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, bg_col, 0.0f);
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held                                                          ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive
                                      : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered
                                                                                                : ImGuiCol_Separator);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, 0.0f);

    return held;
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL ShrinkWidthItemComparer(const void *lhs, const void *rhs)
{
    const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem *a = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem *)lhs;
    const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem *b = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem *)rhs;
    if (int d = (int)(b->Width - a->Width))
        return d;
    return (b->Index - a->Index);
}

// Shrink excess width from a set of item, by removing width from the larger items first.
// Set items Width to -1.0f to disable shrinking this item.
void ImGui::ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem *items, int count, float width_excess)
{
    if (count == 1) {
        if (items[0].Width >= 0.0f)
            items[0].Width = ImMax(items[0].Width - width_excess, 1.0f);
        return;
    }
    ImQsort(items, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem), ShrinkWidthItemComparer);
    int count_same_width = 1;
    while (width_excess > 0.0f && count_same_width < count) {
        while (count_same_width < count && items[0].Width <= items[count_same_width].Width)
            count_same_width++;
        float max_width_to_remove_per_item =
            (count_same_width < count && items[count_same_width].Width >= 0.0f) ? (items[0].Width - items[count_same_width].Width) : (items[0].Width - 1.0f);
        if (max_width_to_remove_per_item <= 0.0f)
            break;
        float width_to_remove_per_item = ImMin(width_excess / count_same_width, max_width_to_remove_per_item);
        for (int item_n = 0; item_n < count_same_width; item_n++)
            items[item_n].Width -= width_to_remove_per_item;
        width_excess -= width_to_remove_per_item * count_same_width;
    }

    // Round width and redistribute remainder
    // Ensure that e.g. the right-most tab of a shrunk tab-bar always reaches exactly at the same distance from the right-most edge of the tab bar separator.
    width_excess = 0.0f;
    for (int n = 0; n < count; n++) {
        float width_rounded = ImFloor(items[n].Width);
        width_excess += items[n].Width - width_rounded;
        items[n].Width = width_rounded;
    }
    while (width_excess > 0.0f)
        for (int n = 0; n < count && width_excess > 0.0f; n++) {
            float width_to_add = ImMin(items[n].InitialWidth - items[n].Width, 1.0f);
            items[n].Width += width_to_add;
            width_excess -= width_to_add;
        }
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount() [Internal]
// - BeginCombo()
// - BeginComboPopup() [Internal]
// - EndCombo()
// - BeginComboPreview() [Internal]
// - EndComboPreview() [Internal]
// - Combo()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (items_count <= 0)
        return FLT_MAX;
    return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
}

bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char *label, const char *preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();

    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags backup_next_window_data_flags = g.NextWindowData.Flags;
    g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
              != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together

    const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth();
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(bb.Min, bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &bb))
        return false;

    // Open on click
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    const ImGuiID popup_id = ImHashStr("##ComboPopup", 0, id);
    bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
    if (pressed && !popup_open) {
        OpenPopupEx(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
        popup_open = true;
    }

    // Render shape
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    const float value_x2 = ImMax(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - arrow_size);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min,
                                        ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Max.y),
                                        frame_col,
                                        style.FrameRounding,
                                        (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton)) {
        ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
        ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Min.y),
                                        bb.Max,
                                        bg_col,
                                        style.FrameRounding,
                                        (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight);
        if (value_x2 + arrow_size - style.FramePadding.x <= bb.Max.x)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(value_x2 + style.FramePadding.y, bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), text_col, ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
    }
    RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);

    // Custom preview
    if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview) {
        g.ComboPreviewData.PreviewRect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y, value_x2, bb.Max.y);
        IM_ASSERT(preview_value == NULL || preview_value[0] == 0);
        preview_value = NULL;
    }

    // Render preview and label
    if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) {
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
        RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Max.y), preview_value, NULL, NULL);
    }
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if (!popup_open)
        return false;

    g.NextWindowData.Flags = backup_next_window_data_flags;
    return BeginComboPopup(popup_id, bb, flags);
}

bool ImGui::BeginComboPopup(ImGuiID popup_id, const ImRect &bb, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (!IsPopupOpen(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None)) {
        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags();
        return false;
    }

    // Set popup size
    float w = bb.GetWidth();
    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint) {
        g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
    } else {
        if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
            flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
        IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_)); // Only one
        int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
        if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular)
            popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall)
            popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge)
            popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
        ImVec2 constraint_min(0.0f, 0.0f), constraint_max(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
        if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize) == 0
            || g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x <= 0.0f) // Don't apply constraints if user specified a size
            constraint_min.x = w;
        if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize) == 0 || g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y <= 0.0f)
            constraint_max.y = CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items);
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(constraint_min, constraint_max);
    }

    // This is essentially a specialized version of BeginPopupEx()
    char name[16];
    ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth

    // Set position given a custom constraint (peak into expected window size so we can position it)
    // FIXME: This might be easier to express with an hypothetical SetNextWindowPosConstraints() function?
    // FIXME: This might be moved to Begin() or at least around the same spot where Tooltips and other Popups are calling FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx()?
    if (ImGuiWindow *popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
        if (popup_window->WasActive) {
            // Always override 'AutoPosLastDirection' to not leave a chance for a past value to affect us.
            ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(popup_window);
            popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection =
                (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Down; // Left = "Below, Toward Left", Down = "Below, Toward Right (default)"
            ImRect r_outer = GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(popup_window);
            ImVec2 pos =
                FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
            SetNextWindowPos(pos);
        }

    // We don't use BeginPopupEx() solely because we have a custom name string, which we could make an argument to BeginPopupEx()
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize
        | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(g.Style.FramePadding.x, g.Style.WindowPadding.y)); // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
    bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
    PopStyleVar();
    if (!ret) {
        EndPopup();
        IM_ASSERT(0); // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
        return false;
    }
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndCombo()
{
    EndPopup();
}

// Call directly after the BeginCombo/EndCombo block. The preview is designed to only host non-interactive elements
// (Experimental, see GitHub issues: #1658, #4168)
bool ImGui::BeginComboPreview()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiComboPreviewData *preview_data = &g.ComboPreviewData;

    if (window->SkipItems || !(g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible))
        return false;
    IM_ASSERT(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x == preview_data->PreviewRect.Min.x
              && g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.y
                  == preview_data->PreviewRect.Min.y); // Didn't call after BeginCombo/EndCombo block or forgot to pass ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview flag?
    if (!window->ClipRect.Overlaps(preview_data->PreviewRect)) // Narrower test (optional)
        return false;

    // FIXME: This could be contained in a PushWorkRect() api
    preview_data->BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    preview_data->BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
    preview_data->BackupCursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine;
    preview_data->BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
    preview_data->BackupLayout = window->DC.LayoutType;
    window->DC.CursorPos = preview_data->PreviewRect.Min + g.Style.FramePadding;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
    PushClipRect(preview_data->PreviewRect.Min, preview_data->PreviewRect.Max, true);

    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndComboPreview()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiComboPreviewData *preview_data = &g.ComboPreviewData;

    // FIXME: Using CursorMaxPos approximation instead of correct AABB which we will store in ImDrawCmd in the future
    ImDrawList *draw_list = window->DrawList;
    if (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x < preview_data->PreviewRect.Max.x && window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y < preview_data->PreviewRect.Max.y)
        if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size > 1) // Unlikely case that the PushClipRect() didn't create a command
        {
            draw_list->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1].ClipRect =
                draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 2].ClipRect;
            draw_list->_TryMergeDrawCmds();
        }
    PopClipRect();
    window->DC.CursorPos = preview_data->BackupCursorPos;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, preview_data->BackupCursorMaxPos);
    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = preview_data->BackupCursorPosPrevLine;
    window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = preview_data->BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset;
    window->DC.LayoutType = preview_data->BackupLayout;
    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
    preview_data->PreviewRect = ImRect();
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void *data, int idx, const char **out_text)
{
    const char *const *items = (const char *const *)data;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = items[idx];
    return true;
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void *data, int idx, const char **out_text)
{
    // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
    const char *items_separated_by_zeros = (const char *)data;
    int items_count = 0;
    const char *p = items_separated_by_zeros;
    while (*p) {
        if (idx == items_count)
            break;
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    if (!*p)
        return false;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = p;
    return true;
}

// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char *label,
                  int *current_item,
                  bool (*items_getter)(void *, int, const char **),
                  void *data,
                  int items_count,
                  int popup_max_height_in_items)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;

    // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
    const char *preview_value = NULL;
    if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
        items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);

    // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
    if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint))
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));

    if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
        return false;

    // Display items
    // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
    bool value_changed = false;
    for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++) {
        PushID(i);
        const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
        const char *item_text;
        if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
            item_text = "*Unknown item*";
        if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected) && *current_item != i) {
            value_changed = true;
            *current_item = i;
        }
        if (item_selected)
            SetItemDefaultFocus();
        PopID();
    }

    EndCombo();

    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);

    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char *label, int *current_item, const char *const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void *)items, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0"
bool ImGui::Combo(const char *label, int *current_item, const char *items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items)
{
    int items_count = 0;
    const char *p = items_separated_by_zeros; // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
    while (*p) {
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void *)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - DataTypeGetInfo()
// - DataTypeFormatString()
// - DataTypeApplyOp()
// - DataTypeApplyOpFromText()
// - DataTypeCompare()
// - DataTypeClamp()
// - GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision
// - RoundScalarWithFormat<>()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] = {
    {sizeof(char), "S8", "%d", "%d"}, // ImGuiDataType_S8
    {sizeof(unsigned char), "U8", "%u", "%u"},
    {sizeof(short), "S16", "%d", "%d"}, // ImGuiDataType_S16
    {sizeof(unsigned short), "U16", "%u", "%u"},
    {sizeof(int), "S32", "%d", "%d"}, // ImGuiDataType_S32
    {sizeof(unsigned int), "U32", "%u", "%u"},
#ifdef _MSC_VER
    {sizeof(ImS64), "S64", "%I64d", "%I64d"}, // ImGuiDataType_S64
    {sizeof(ImU64), "U64", "%I64u", "%I64u"},
#else
    {sizeof(ImS64), "S64", "%lld", "%lld"}, // ImGuiDataType_S64
    {sizeof(ImU64), "U64", "%llu", "%llu"},
#endif
    {sizeof(float), "float", "%.3f", "%f"}, // ImGuiDataType_Float (float are promoted to double in va_arg)
    {sizeof(double), "double", "%f", "%lf"}, // ImGuiDataType_Double
};
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);

const ImGuiDataTypeInfo *ImGui::DataTypeGetInfo(ImGuiDataType data_type)
{
    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    return &GDataTypeInfo[data_type];
}

int ImGui::DataTypeFormatString(char *buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void *p_data, const char *format)
{
    // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing integer arguments
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32 *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64 *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS8 *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU8 *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS16 *)p_data);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU16 *)p_data);
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return 0;
}

void ImGui::DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void *output, const void *arg1, const void *arg2)
{
    IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
    switch (data_type) {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImS8 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS8 *)arg1, *(const ImS8 *)arg2, IM_S8_MIN, IM_S8_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImS8 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS8 *)arg1, *(const ImS8 *)arg2, IM_S8_MIN, IM_S8_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImU8 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU8 *)arg1, *(const ImU8 *)arg2, IM_U8_MIN, IM_U8_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImU8 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU8 *)arg1, *(const ImU8 *)arg2, IM_U8_MIN, IM_U8_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_S16:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImS16 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS16 *)arg1, *(const ImS16 *)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImS16 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS16 *)arg1, *(const ImS16 *)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_U16:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImU16 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU16 *)arg1, *(const ImU16 *)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImU16 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU16 *)arg1, *(const ImU16 *)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImS32 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS32 *)arg1, *(const ImS32 *)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImS32 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS32 *)arg1, *(const ImS32 *)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImU32 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU32 *)arg1, *(const ImU32 *)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImU32 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU32 *)arg1, *(const ImU32 *)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImS64 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS64 *)arg1, *(const ImS64 *)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImS64 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS64 *)arg1, *(const ImS64 *)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(ImU64 *)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU64 *)arg1, *(const ImU64 *)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX);
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(ImU64 *)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU64 *)arg1, *(const ImU64 *)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX);
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(float *)output = *(const float *)arg1 + *(const float *)arg2;
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(float *)output = *(const float *)arg1 - *(const float *)arg2;
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        if (op == '+') {
            *(double *)output = *(const double *)arg1 + *(const double *)arg2;
        }
        if (op == '-') {
            *(double *)output = *(const double *)arg1 - *(const double *)arg2;
        }
        return;
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:
        break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
}

// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
bool ImGui::DataTypeApplyFromText(const char *buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void *p_data, const char *format)
{
    while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
        buf++;
    if (!buf[0])
        return false;

    // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
    const ImGuiDataTypeInfo *type_info = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type);
    ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage data_backup;
    memcpy(&data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size);

    // Sanitize format
    // - For float/double we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in, so force them into %f and %lf
    // - In theory could treat empty format as using default, but this would only cover rare/bizarre case of using InputScalar() + integer + format string
    // without %.
    char format_sanitized[32];
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        format = type_info->ScanFmt;
    else
        format = ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(format, format_sanitized, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format_sanitized));

    // Small types need a 32-bit buffer to receive the result from scanf()
    int v32 = 0;
    if (sscanf(buf, format, type_info->Size >= 4 ? p_data : &v32) < 1)
        return false;
    if (type_info->Size < 4) {
        if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
            *(ImS8 *)p_data = (ImS8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S8_MIN, (int)IM_S8_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
            *(ImU8 *)p_data = (ImU8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U8_MIN, (int)IM_U8_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
            *(ImS16 *)p_data = (ImS16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S16_MIN, (int)IM_S16_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
            *(ImU16 *)p_data = (ImU16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U16_MIN, (int)IM_U16_MAX);
        else
            IM_ASSERT(0);
    }

    return memcmp(&data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size) != 0;
}

template<typename T>
static int DataTypeCompareT(const T *lhs, const T *rhs)
{
    if (*lhs < *rhs)
        return -1;
    if (*lhs > *rhs)
        return +1;
    return 0;
}

int ImGui::DataTypeCompare(ImGuiDataType data_type, const void *arg_1, const void *arg_2)
{
    switch (data_type) {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImS8>((const ImS8 *)arg_1, (const ImS8 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImU8>((const ImU8 *)arg_1, (const ImU8 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_S16:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImS16>((const ImS16 *)arg_1, (const ImS16 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_U16:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImU16>((const ImU16 *)arg_1, (const ImU16 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImS32>((const ImS32 *)arg_1, (const ImS32 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImU32>((const ImU32 *)arg_1, (const ImU32 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImS64>((const ImS64 *)arg_1, (const ImS64 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        return DataTypeCompareT<ImU64>((const ImU64 *)arg_1, (const ImU64 *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        return DataTypeCompareT<float>((const float *)arg_1, (const float *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        return DataTypeCompareT<double>((const double *)arg_1, (const double *)arg_2);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:
        break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return 0;
}

template<typename T>
static bool DataTypeClampT(T *v, const T *v_min, const T *v_max)
{
    // Clamp, both sides are optional, return true if modified
    if (v_min && *v < *v_min) {
        *v = *v_min;
        return true;
    }
    if (v_max && *v > *v_max) {
        *v = *v_max;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::DataTypeClamp(ImGuiDataType data_type, void *p_data, const void *p_min, const void *p_max)
{
    switch (data_type) {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImS8>((ImS8 *)p_data, (const ImS8 *)p_min, (const ImS8 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImU8>((ImU8 *)p_data, (const ImU8 *)p_min, (const ImU8 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_S16:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImS16>((ImS16 *)p_data, (const ImS16 *)p_min, (const ImS16 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_U16:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImU16>((ImU16 *)p_data, (const ImU16 *)p_min, (const ImU16 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImS32>((ImS32 *)p_data, (const ImS32 *)p_min, (const ImS32 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImU32>((ImU32 *)p_data, (const ImU32 *)p_min, (const ImU32 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImS64>((ImS64 *)p_data, (const ImS64 *)p_min, (const ImS64 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        return DataTypeClampT<ImU64>((ImU64 *)p_data, (const ImU64 *)p_min, (const ImU64 *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        return DataTypeClampT<float>((float *)p_data, (const float *)p_min, (const float *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        return DataTypeClampT<double>((double *)p_data, (const double *)p_min, (const double *)p_max);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:
        break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision)
{
    static const float min_steps[10] = {1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f};
    if (decimal_precision < 0)
        return FLT_MIN;
    return (decimal_precision < IM_ARRAYSIZE(min_steps)) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
}

template<typename TYPE>
TYPE ImGui::RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char *format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
{
    IM_UNUSED(data_type);
    IM_ASSERT(data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const char *fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
        return v;

    // Sanitize format
    char fmt_sanitized[32];
    ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(fmt_start, fmt_sanitized, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_sanitized));
    fmt_start = fmt_sanitized;

    // Format value with our rounding, and read back
    char v_str[64];
    ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
    const char *p = v_str;
    while (*p == ' ')
        p++;
    v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);

    return v;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - DragBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
// - DragBehavior() [Internal]
// - DragScalar()
// - DragScalarN()
// - DragFloat()
// - DragFloat2()
// - DragFloat3()
// - DragFloat4()
// - DragFloatRange2()
// - DragInt()
// - DragInt2()
// - DragInt3()
// - DragInt4()
// - DragIntRange2()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE *v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
    const bool is_clamped = (v_min < v_max);
    const bool is_logarithmic = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) != 0;
    const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);

    // Default tweak speed
    if (v_speed == 0.0f && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX))
        v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);

    // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
    float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && IsMouseDragPastThreshold(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR)) {
        adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta[axis];
        if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
            adjust_delta *= 1.0f / 100.0f;
        if (g.IO.KeyShift)
            adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
    } else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) {
        const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
        const bool tweak_slow = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow);
        const bool tweak_fast = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast);
        const float tweak_factor = tweak_slow ? 1.0f / 1.0f : tweak_fast ? 10.0f : 1.0f;
        adjust_delta = GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis) * tweak_factor;
        v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
    }
    adjust_delta *= v_speed;

    // For vertical drag we currently assume that Up=higher value (like we do with vertical sliders). This may become a parameter.
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
        adjust_delta = -adjust_delta;

    // For logarithmic use our range is effectively 0..1 so scale the delta into that range
    if (is_logarithmic && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX) && ((v_max - v_min) > 0.000001f)) // Epsilon to avoid /0
        adjust_delta /= (float)(v_max - v_min);

    // Clear current value on activation
    // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is
    // 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300.
    bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
    bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = is_clamped && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
    if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward) {
        g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    } else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f) {
        g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
    }

    if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
        return false;

    TYPE v_cur = *v;
    FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;

    float logarithmic_zero_epsilon = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true
    const float zero_deadzone_halfsize = 0.0f; // Drag widgets have no deadzone (as it doesn't make sense)
    if (is_logarithmic) {
        // When using logarithmic sliders, we need to clamp to avoid hitting zero, but our choice of clamp value greatly affects slider precision. We attempt to
        // use the specified precision to estimate a good lower bound.
        const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 1;
        logarithmic_zero_epsilon = ImPow(0.1f, (float)decimal_precision);

        // Convert to parametric space, apply delta, convert back
        float v_old_parametric =
            ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, v_cur, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
        float v_new_parametric = v_old_parametric + g.DragCurrentAccum;
        v_cur = ScaleValueFromRatioT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type,
                                                                  v_new_parametric,
                                                                  v_min,
                                                                  v_max,
                                                                  is_logarithmic,
                                                                  logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                                                  zero_deadzone_halfsize);
        v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_parametric;
    } else {
        v_cur += (SIGNEDTYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
    }

    // Round to user desired precision based on format string
    if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat))
        v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);

    // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
    g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    if (is_logarithmic) {
        // Convert to parametric space, apply delta, convert back
        float v_new_parametric =
            ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, v_cur, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_new_parametric - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
    } else {
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
    }

    // Lose zero sign for float/double
    if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
        v_cur = (TYPE)0;

    // Clamp values (+ handle overflow/wrap-around for integer types)
    if (*v != v_cur && is_clamped) {
        if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f && !is_floating_point))
            v_cur = v_min;
        if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f && !is_floating_point))
            v_cur = v_max;
    }

    // Apply result
    if (*v == v_cur)
        return false;
    *v = v_cur;
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id,
                         ImGuiDataType data_type,
                         void *p_v,
                         float v_speed,
                         const void *p_min,
                         const void *p_max,
                         const char *format,
                         ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    // Read imgui.cpp "API BREAKING CHANGES" section for 1.78 if you hit this assert.
    IM_ASSERT((flags == 1 || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_) == 0) && "Invalid ImGuiSliderFlags flags! Has the 'float power' argument been mistakenly cast to flags? Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead.");

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (g.ActiveId == id) {
        // Those are the things we can do easily outside the DragBehaviorT<> template, saves code generation.
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            ClearActiveID();
        else if ((g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) && g.NavActivatePressedId == id
                 && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            ClearActiveID();
    }
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        return false;
    if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly) || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly))
        return false;

    switch (data_type) {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8: {
        ImS32 v32 = (ImS32) * (ImS8 *)p_v;
        bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_S32,
                                                    &v32,
                                                    v_speed,
                                                    p_min ? *(const ImS8 *)p_min : IM_S8_MIN,
                                                    p_max ? *(const ImS8 *)p_max : IM_S8_MAX,
                                                    format,
                                                    flags);
        if (r)
            *(ImS8 *)p_v = (ImS8)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_U8: {
        ImU32 v32 = (ImU32) * (ImU8 *)p_v;
        bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_U32,
                                                    &v32,
                                                    v_speed,
                                                    p_min ? *(const ImU8 *)p_min : IM_U8_MIN,
                                                    p_max ? *(const ImU8 *)p_max : IM_U8_MAX,
                                                    format,
                                                    flags);
        if (r)
            *(ImU8 *)p_v = (ImU8)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_S16: {
        ImS32 v32 = (ImS32) * (ImS16 *)p_v;
        bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_S32,
                                                    &v32,
                                                    v_speed,
                                                    p_min ? *(const ImS16 *)p_min : IM_S16_MIN,
                                                    p_max ? *(const ImS16 *)p_max : IM_S16_MAX,
                                                    format,
                                                    flags);
        if (r)
            *(ImS16 *)p_v = (ImS16)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_U16: {
        ImU32 v32 = (ImU32) * (ImU16 *)p_v;
        bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_U32,
                                                    &v32,
                                                    v_speed,
                                                    p_min ? *(const ImU16 *)p_min : IM_U16_MIN,
                                                    p_max ? *(const ImU16 *)p_max : IM_U16_MAX,
                                                    format,
                                                    flags);
        if (r)
            *(ImU16 *)p_v = (ImU16)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(data_type,
                                                  (ImS32 *)p_v,
                                                  v_speed,
                                                  p_min ? *(const ImS32 *)p_min : IM_S32_MIN,
                                                  p_max ? *(const ImS32 *)p_max : IM_S32_MAX,
                                                  format,
                                                  flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(data_type,
                                                  (ImU32 *)p_v,
                                                  v_speed,
                                                  p_min ? *(const ImU32 *)p_min : IM_U32_MIN,
                                                  p_max ? *(const ImU32 *)p_max : IM_U32_MAX,
                                                  format,
                                                  flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type,
                                                   (ImS64 *)p_v,
                                                   v_speed,
                                                   p_min ? *(const ImS64 *)p_min : IM_S64_MIN,
                                                   p_max ? *(const ImS64 *)p_max : IM_S64_MAX,
                                                   format,
                                                   flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type,
                                                   (ImU64 *)p_v,
                                                   v_speed,
                                                   p_min ? *(const ImU64 *)p_min : IM_U64_MIN,
                                                   p_max ? *(const ImU64 *)p_max : IM_U64_MAX,
                                                   format,
                                                   flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float>(data_type,
                                                  (float *)p_v,
                                                  v_speed,
                                                  p_min ? *(const float *)p_min : -FLT_MAX,
                                                  p_max ? *(const float *)p_max : FLT_MAX,
                                                  format,
                                                  flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        return DragBehaviorT<double, double, double>(data_type,
                                                     (double *)p_v,
                                                     v_speed,
                                                     p_min ? *(const double *)p_min : -DBL_MAX,
                                                     p_max ? *(const double *)p_max : DBL_MAX,
                                                     format,
                                                     flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:
        break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a Drag widget, p_min and p_max are optional.
// Read code of e.g. DragFloat(), DragInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char *label,
                       ImGuiDataType data_type,
                       void *p_data,
                       float v_speed,
                       const void *p_min,
                       const void *p_max,
                       const char *format,
                       ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    const bool temp_input_allowed = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput) == 0;
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable : 0))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;

    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags);
    bool temp_input_is_active = temp_input_allowed && TempInputIsActive(id);
    if (!temp_input_is_active) {
        // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an InputText
        const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = temp_input_allowed && (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0;
        const bool clicked = hovered && IsMouseClicked(0, id);
        const bool double_clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2 && TestKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id));
        const bool make_active = (input_requested_by_tabbing || clicked || double_clicked || g.NavActivateId == id);
        if (make_active && (clicked || double_clicked))
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id);
        if (make_active && temp_input_allowed)
            if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || double_clicked
                || (g.NavActivateId == id && (g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput)))
                temp_input_is_active = true;

        // (Optional) simple click (without moving) turns Drag into an InputText
        if (g.IO.ConfigDragClickToInputText && temp_input_allowed && !temp_input_is_active)
            if (g.ActiveId == id && hovered && g.IO.MouseReleased[0] && !IsMouseDragPastThreshold(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR)) {
                g.NavActivateId = id;
                g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput;
                temp_input_is_active = true;
            }

        if (make_active && !temp_input_is_active) {
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            SetFocusID(id, window);
            FocusWindow(window);
            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
        }
    }

    if (temp_input_is_active) {
        // Only clamp CTRL+Click input when ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is set
        const bool is_clamp_input =
            (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp) != 0 && (p_min == NULL || p_max == NULL || DataTypeCompare(data_type, p_min, p_max) < 0);
        return TempInputScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format, is_clamp_input ? p_min : NULL, is_clamp_input ? p_max : NULL);
    }

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);

    // Drag behavior
    const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, flags);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    const char *value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable : 0));
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char *label,
                        ImGuiDataType data_type,
                        void *p_data,
                        int components,
                        float v_speed,
                        const void *p_min,
                        const void *p_max,
                        const char *format,
                        ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++) {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= DragScalar("", data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, flags);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        p_data = (void *)((char *)p_data + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    const char *label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end) {
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char *label, float *v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char *label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char *label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char *label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

// NB: You likely want to specify the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp when using this.
bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char *label,
                            float *v_current_min,
                            float *v_current_max,
                            float v_speed,
                            float v_min,
                            float v_max,
                            const char *format,
                            const char *format_max,
                            ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());

    float min_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min;
    float min_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max);
    ImGuiSliderFlags min_flags = flags | ((min_min == min_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
    bool value_changed = DragScalar("##min", ImGuiDataType_Float, v_current_min, v_speed, &min_min, &min_max, format, min_flags);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    float max_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min);
    float max_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max;
    ImGuiSliderFlags max_flags = flags | ((max_min == max_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
    value_changed |= DragScalar("##max", ImGuiDataType_Float, v_current_max, v_speed, &max_min, &max_max, format_max ? format_max : format, max_flags);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
bool ImGui::DragInt(const char *label, int *v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char *label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char *label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char *label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

// NB: You likely want to specify the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp when using this.
bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char *label,
                          int *v_current_min,
                          int *v_current_max,
                          float v_speed,
                          int v_min,
                          int v_max,
                          const char *format,
                          const char *format_max,
                          ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());

    int min_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min;
    int min_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max);
    ImGuiSliderFlags min_flags = flags | ((min_min == min_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
    bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, min_min, min_max, format, min_flags);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    int max_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min);
    int max_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max;
    ImGuiSliderFlags max_flags = flags | ((max_min == max_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
    value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, max_min, max_max, format_max ? format_max : format, max_flags);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ScaleRatioFromValueT<> [Internal]
// - ScaleValueFromRatioT<> [Internal]
// - SliderBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
// - SliderBehavior() [Internal]
// - SliderScalar()
// - SliderScalarN()
// - SliderFloat()
// - SliderFloat2()
// - SliderFloat3()
// - SliderFloat4()
// - SliderAngle()
// - SliderInt()
// - SliderInt2()
// - SliderInt3()
// - SliderInt4()
// - VSliderScalar()
// - VSliderFloat()
// - VSliderInt()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Convert a value v in the output space of a slider into a parametric position on the slider itself (the logical opposite of ScaleValueFromRatioT)
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
float ImGui::ScaleRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type,
                                  TYPE v,
                                  TYPE v_min,
                                  TYPE v_max,
                                  bool is_logarithmic,
                                  float logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                  float zero_deadzone_halfsize)
{
    if (v_min == v_max)
        return 0.0f;
    IM_UNUSED(data_type);

    const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
    if (is_logarithmic) {
        bool flipped = v_max < v_min;

        if (flipped) // Handle the case where the range is backwards
            ImSwap(v_min, v_max);

        // Fudge min/max to avoid getting close to log(0)
        FLOATTYPE v_min_fudged =
            (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_min) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_min < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_min;
        FLOATTYPE v_max_fudged =
            (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_max) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_max < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_max;

        // Awkward special cases - we need ranges of the form (-100 .. 0) to convert to (-100 .. -epsilon), not (-100 .. epsilon)
        if ((v_min == 0.0f) && (v_max < 0.0f))
            v_min_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon;
        else if ((v_max == 0.0f) && (v_min < 0.0f))
            v_max_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon;

        float result;
        if (v_clamped <= v_min_fudged)
            result = 0.0f; // Workaround for values that are in-range but below our fudge
        else if (v_clamped >= v_max_fudged)
            result = 1.0f; // Workaround for values that are in-range but above our fudge
        else if ((v_min * v_max) < 0.0f) // Range crosses zero, so split into two portions
        {
            float zero_point_center = (-(float)v_min)
                / ((float)v_max
                   - (float)v_min); // The zero point in parametric space.  There's an argument we should take the logarithmic nature into account when
                                    // calculating this, but for now this should do (and the most common case of a symmetrical range works fine)
            float zero_point_snap_L = zero_point_center - zero_deadzone_halfsize;
            float zero_point_snap_R = zero_point_center + zero_deadzone_halfsize;
            if (v == 0.0f)
                result = zero_point_center; // Special case for exactly zero
            else if (v < 0.0f)
                result = (1.0f - (float)(ImLog(-(FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / logarithmic_zero_epsilon) / ImLog(-v_min_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon)))
                    * zero_point_snap_L;
            else
                result = zero_point_snap_R
                    + ((float)(ImLog((FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / logarithmic_zero_epsilon) / ImLog(v_max_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon))
                       * (1.0f - zero_point_snap_R));
        } else if ((v_min < 0.0f) || (v_max < 0.0f)) // Entirely negative slider
            result = 1.0f - (float)(ImLog(-(FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / -v_max_fudged) / ImLog(-v_min_fudged / -v_max_fudged));
        else
            result = (float)(ImLog((FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / v_min_fudged) / ImLog(v_max_fudged / v_min_fudged));

        return flipped ? (1.0f - result) : result;
    } else {
        // Linear slider
        return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(SIGNEDTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(SIGNEDTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
    }
}

// Convert a parametric position on a slider into a value v in the output space (the logical opposite of ScaleRatioFromValueT)
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
TYPE ImGui::ScaleValueFromRatioT(ImGuiDataType data_type,
                                 float t,
                                 TYPE v_min,
                                 TYPE v_max,
                                 bool is_logarithmic,
                                 float logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                 float zero_deadzone_halfsize)
{
    // We special-case the extents because otherwise our logarithmic fudging can lead to "mathematically correct"
    // but non-intuitive behaviors like a fully-left slider not actually reaching the minimum value. Also generally simpler.
    if (t <= 0.0f || v_min == v_max)
        return v_min;
    if (t >= 1.0f)
        return v_max;

    TYPE result = (TYPE)0;
    if (is_logarithmic) {
        // Fudge min/max to avoid getting silly results close to zero
        FLOATTYPE v_min_fudged =
            (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_min) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_min < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_min;
        FLOATTYPE v_max_fudged =
            (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_max) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_max < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_max;

        const bool flipped = v_max < v_min; // Check if range is "backwards"
        if (flipped)
            ImSwap(v_min_fudged, v_max_fudged);

        // Awkward special case - we need ranges of the form (-100 .. 0) to convert to (-100 .. -epsilon), not (-100 .. epsilon)
        if ((v_max == 0.0f) && (v_min < 0.0f))
            v_max_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon;

        float t_with_flip = flipped ? (1.0f - t) : t; // t, but flipped if necessary to account for us flipping the range

        if ((v_min * v_max) < 0.0f) // Range crosses zero, so we have to do this in two parts
        {
            float zero_point_center = (-(float)ImMin(v_min, v_max)) / ImAbs((float)v_max - (float)v_min); // The zero point in parametric space
            float zero_point_snap_L = zero_point_center - zero_deadzone_halfsize;
            float zero_point_snap_R = zero_point_center + zero_deadzone_halfsize;
            if (t_with_flip >= zero_point_snap_L && t_with_flip <= zero_point_snap_R)
                result = (TYPE)0.0f; // Special case to make getting exactly zero possible (the epsilon prevents it otherwise)
            else if (t_with_flip < zero_point_center)
                result = (TYPE)
                    - (logarithmic_zero_epsilon * ImPow(-v_min_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon, (FLOATTYPE)(1.0f - (t_with_flip / zero_point_snap_L))));
            else
                result = (TYPE)(logarithmic_zero_epsilon
                                * ImPow(v_max_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon, (FLOATTYPE)((t_with_flip - zero_point_snap_R) / (1.0f - zero_point_snap_R))));
        } else if ((v_min < 0.0f) || (v_max < 0.0f)) // Entirely negative slider
            result = (TYPE) - (-v_max_fudged * ImPow(-v_min_fudged / -v_max_fudged, (FLOATTYPE)(1.0f - t_with_flip)));
        else
            result = (TYPE)(v_min_fudged * ImPow(v_max_fudged / v_min_fudged, (FLOATTYPE)t_with_flip));
    } else {
        // Linear slider
        const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
        if (is_floating_point) {
            result = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, t);
        } else if (t < 1.0) {
            // - For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
            //   This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
            // - Not doing a *1.0 multiply at the end of a range as it tends to be lossy. While absolute aiming at a large s64/u64
            //   range is going to be imprecise anyway, with this check we at least make the edge values matches expected limits.
            FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (SIGNEDTYPE)(v_max - v_min) * t;
            result = (TYPE)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_min + (SIGNEDTYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)(v_min > v_max ? -0.5 : 0.5)));
        }
    }

    return result;
}

// FIXME: Try to move more of the code into shared SliderBehavior()
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect &bb,
                            ImGuiID id,
                            ImGuiDataType data_type,
                            TYPE *v,
                            const TYPE v_min,
                            const TYPE v_max,
                            const char *format,
                            ImGuiSliderFlags flags,
                            ImRect *out_grab_bb)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
    const bool is_logarithmic = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) != 0;
    const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const float v_range_f = (float)(v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max); // We don't need high precision for what we do with it.

    // Calculate bounds
    const float grab_padding = 2.0f; // FIXME: Should be part of style.
    const float slider_sz = (bb.Max[axis] - bb.Min[axis]) - grab_padding * 2.0f;
    float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
    if (!is_floating_point && v_range_f >= 0.0f) // v_range_f < 0 may happen on integer overflows
        grab_sz = ImMax(slider_sz / (v_range_f + 1), style.GrabMinSize); // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
    grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
    const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
    const float slider_usable_pos_min = bb.Min[axis] + grab_padding + grab_sz * 0.5f;
    const float slider_usable_pos_max = bb.Max[axis] - grab_padding - grab_sz * 0.5f;

    float logarithmic_zero_epsilon = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true
    float zero_deadzone_halfsize = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true
    if (is_logarithmic) {
        // When using logarithmic sliders, we need to clamp to avoid hitting zero, but our choice of clamp value greatly affects slider precision. We attempt to
        // use the specified precision to estimate a good lower bound.
        const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 1;
        logarithmic_zero_epsilon = ImPow(0.1f, (float)decimal_precision);
        zero_deadzone_halfsize = (style.LogSliderDeadzone * 0.5f) / ImMax(slider_usable_sz, 1.0f);
    }

    // Process interacting with the slider
    bool value_changed = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id) {
        bool set_new_value = false;
        float clicked_t = 0.0f;
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse) {
            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0]) {
                ClearActiveID();
            } else {
                const float mouse_abs_pos = g.IO.MousePos[axis];
                if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) {
                    float grab_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type,
                                                                                     *v,
                                                                                     v_min,
                                                                                     v_max,
                                                                                     is_logarithmic,
                                                                                     logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                                                                     zero_deadzone_halfsize);
                    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
                        grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
                    const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
                    const bool clicked_around_grab = (mouse_abs_pos >= grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f - 1.0f)
                        && (mouse_abs_pos <= grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f + 1.0f); // No harm being extra generous here.
                    g.SliderGrabClickOffset = (clicked_around_grab && is_floating_point) ? mouse_abs_pos - grab_pos : 0.0f;
                }
                if (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f)
                    clicked_t = ImSaturate((mouse_abs_pos - g.SliderGrabClickOffset - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz);
                if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
                    clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
                set_new_value = true;
            }
        } else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) {
            if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) {
                g.SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; // Reset any stored nav delta upon activation
                g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false;
            }

            float input_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis) : -GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis);
            if (input_delta != 0.0f) {
                const bool tweak_slow =
                    IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow);
                const bool tweak_fast =
                    IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast);
                const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
                if (decimal_precision > 0) {
                    input_delta /= 100.0f; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
                    if (tweak_slow)
                        input_delta /= 10.0f;
                } else {
                    if ((v_range_f >= -100.0f && v_range_f <= 100.0f && v_range_f != 0.0f) || tweak_slow)
                        input_delta = ((input_delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / v_range_f; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
                    else
                        input_delta /= 100.0f;
                }
                if (tweak_fast)
                    input_delta *= 10.0f;

                g.SliderCurrentAccum += input_delta;
                g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = true;
            }

            float delta = g.SliderCurrentAccum;
            if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) {
                ClearActiveID();
            } else if (g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty) {
                clicked_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type,
                                                                              *v,
                                                                              v_min,
                                                                              v_max,
                                                                              is_logarithmic,
                                                                              logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                                                              zero_deadzone_halfsize);

                if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f)
                    || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
                {
                    set_new_value = false;
                    g.SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; // If pushing up against the limits, don't continue to accumulate
                } else {
                    set_new_value = true;
                    float old_clicked_t = clicked_t;
                    clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);

                    // Calculate what our "new" clicked_t will be, and thus how far we actually moved the slider, and subtract this from the accumulator
                    TYPE v_new = ScaleValueFromRatioT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type,
                                                                                   clicked_t,
                                                                                   v_min,
                                                                                   v_max,
                                                                                   is_logarithmic,
                                                                                   logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                                                                   zero_deadzone_halfsize);
                    if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat))
                        v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);
                    float new_clicked_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type,
                                                                                            v_new,
                                                                                            v_min,
                                                                                            v_max,
                                                                                            is_logarithmic,
                                                                                            logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                                                                            zero_deadzone_halfsize);

                    if (delta > 0)
                        g.SliderCurrentAccum -= ImMin(new_clicked_t - old_clicked_t, delta);
                    else
                        g.SliderCurrentAccum -= ImMax(new_clicked_t - old_clicked_t, delta);
                }

                g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false;
            }
        }

        if (set_new_value)
            if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly) || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly))
                set_new_value = false;

        if (set_new_value) {
            TYPE v_new = ScaleValueFromRatioT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type,
                                                                           clicked_t,
                                                                           v_min,
                                                                           v_max,
                                                                           is_logarithmic,
                                                                           logarithmic_zero_epsilon,
                                                                           zero_deadzone_halfsize);

            // Round to user desired precision based on format string
            if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat))
                v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);

            // Apply result
            if (*v != v_new) {
                *v = v_new;
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
    }

    if (slider_sz < 1.0f) {
        *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min, bb.Min);
    } else {
        // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller
        float grab_t =
            ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
            grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
        const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
        else
            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f);
    }

    return value_changed;
}

// For 32-bit and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect &bb,
                           ImGuiID id,
                           ImGuiDataType data_type,
                           void *p_v,
                           const void *p_min,
                           const void *p_max,
                           const char *format,
                           ImGuiSliderFlags flags,
                           ImRect *out_grab_bb)
{
    // Read imgui.cpp "API BREAKING CHANGES" section for 1.78 if you hit this assert.
    IM_ASSERT((flags == 1 || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_) == 0) && "Invalid ImGuiSliderFlags flag!  Has the 'float power' argument been mistakenly cast to flags? Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead.");

    switch (data_type) {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8: {
        ImS32 v32 = (ImS32) * (ImS8 *)p_v;
        bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS8 *)p_min, *(const ImS8 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
        if (r)
            *(ImS8 *)p_v = (ImS8)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_U8: {
        ImU32 v32 = (ImU32) * (ImU8 *)p_v;
        bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU8 *)p_min, *(const ImU8 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
        if (r)
            *(ImU8 *)p_v = (ImU8)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_S16: {
        ImS32 v32 = (ImS32) * (ImS16 *)p_v;
        bool r =
            SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS16 *)p_min, *(const ImS16 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
        if (r)
            *(ImS16 *)p_v = (ImS16)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_U16: {
        ImU32 v32 = (ImU32) * (ImU16 *)p_v;
        bool r =
            SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU16 *)p_min, *(const ImU16 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
        if (r)
            *(ImU16 *)p_v = (ImU16)v32;
        return r;
    }
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32 *)p_min >= IM_S32_MIN / 2 && *(const ImS32 *)p_max <= IM_S32_MAX / 2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32 *)p_v, *(const ImS32 *)p_min, *(const ImS32 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32 *)p_max <= IM_U32_MAX / 2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32 *)p_v, *(const ImU32 *)p_min, *(const ImU32 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64 *)p_min >= IM_S64_MIN / 2 && *(const ImS64 *)p_max <= IM_S64_MAX / 2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64 *)p_v, *(const ImS64 *)p_min, *(const ImS64 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64 *)p_max <= IM_U64_MAX / 2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64 *)p_v, *(const ImU64 *)p_min, *(const ImU64 *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const float *)p_min >= -FLT_MAX / 2.0f && *(const float *)p_max <= FLT_MAX / 2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float>(bb, id, data_type, (float *)p_v, *(const float *)p_min, *(const float *)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const double *)p_min >= -DBL_MAX / 2.0f && *(const double *)p_max <= DBL_MAX / 2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<double, double, double>(bb,
                                                       id,
                                                       data_type,
                                                       (double *)p_v,
                                                       *(const double *)p_min,
                                                       *(const double *)p_max,
                                                       format,
                                                       flags,
                                                       out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:
        break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a slider, they are all required.
// Read code of e.g. SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char *label,
                         ImGuiDataType data_type,
                         void *p_data,
                         const void *p_min,
                         const void *p_max,
                         const char *format,
                         ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    const bool temp_input_allowed = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput) == 0;
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable : 0))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;

    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags);
    bool temp_input_is_active = temp_input_allowed && TempInputIsActive(id);
    if (!temp_input_is_active) {
        // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
        const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = temp_input_allowed && (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0;
        const bool clicked = hovered && IsMouseClicked(0, id);
        const bool make_active = (input_requested_by_tabbing || clicked || g.NavActivateId == id);
        if (make_active && clicked)
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id);
        if (make_active && temp_input_allowed)
            if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || (g.NavActivateId == id && (g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput)))
                temp_input_is_active = true;

        if (make_active && !temp_input_is_active) {
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            SetFocusID(id, window);
            FocusWindow(window);
            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
        }
    }

    if (temp_input_is_active) {
        // Only clamp CTRL+Click input when ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is set
        const bool is_clamp_input = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp) != 0;
        return TempInputScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format, is_clamp_input ? p_min : NULL, is_clamp_input ? p_max : NULL);
    }

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, flags, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    if (grab_bb.Max.x > grab_bb.Min.x)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min,
                                        grab_bb.Max,
                                        GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab),
                                        style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    const char *value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable : 0));
    return value_changed;
}

// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char *label,
                          ImGuiDataType data_type,
                          void *v,
                          int components,
                          const void *v_min,
                          const void *v_max,
                          const char *format,
                          ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++) {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= SliderScalar("", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, flags);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void *)((char *)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    const char *label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end) {
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char *label, float *v, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char *label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char *label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char *label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char *label, float *v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    if (format == NULL)
        format = "%.0f deg";
    float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2 * IM_PI);
    bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, format, flags);
    *v_rad = v_deg * (2 * IM_PI) / 360.0f;
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char *label, int *v, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char *label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char *label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char *label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char *label,
                          const ImVec2 &size,
                          ImGuiDataType data_type,
                          void *p_data,
                          const void *p_min,
                          const void *p_max,
                          const char *format,
                          ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;

    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags);
    const bool clicked = hovered && IsMouseClicked(0, id);
    if (clicked || g.NavActivateId == id) {
        if (clicked)
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id);
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
    }

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, flags | ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    if (grab_bb.Max.y > grab_bb.Min.y)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min,
                                        grab_bb.Max,
                                        GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab),
                                        style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
    char value_buf[64];
    const char *value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size, float *v, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size, int *v, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ImParseFormatFindStart() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatFindEnd() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatTrimDecorations() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatPrecision() [Internal]
// - TempInputTextScalar() [Internal]
// - InputScalar()
// - InputScalarN()
// - InputFloat()
// - InputFloat2()
// - InputFloat3()
// - InputFloat4()
// - InputInt()
// - InputInt2()
// - InputInt3()
// - InputInt4()
// - InputDouble()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
const char *ImParseFormatFindStart(const char *fmt)
{
    while (char c = fmt[0]) {
        if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
            return fmt;
        else if (c == '%')
            fmt++;
        fmt++;
    }
    return fmt;
}

const char *ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char *fmt)
{
    // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
    const unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I' - 'A')) | (1 << ('L' - 'A'));
    const unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask =
        (1 << ('h' - 'a')) | (1 << ('j' - 'a')) | (1 << ('l' - 'a')) | (1 << ('t' - 'a')) | (1 << ('w' - 'a')) | (1 << ('z' - 'a'));
    for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++) {
        if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
        if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
    }
    return fmt;
}

// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
//  fmt = "blah blah"  -> return ""
//  fmt = "%.3f"       -> return fmt
//  fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
//  fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
const char *ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char *fmt, char *buf, size_t buf_size)
{
    const char *fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
        return "";
    const char *fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
    if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
        return fmt_start;
    ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_start) + 1, buf_size));
    return buf;
}

// Sanitize format
// - Zero terminate so extra characters after format (e.g. "%f123") don't confuse atof/atoi
// - stb_sprintf.h supports several new modifiers which format numbers in a way that also makes them incompatible atof/atoi.
void ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(const char *fmt_in, char *fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size)
{
    const char *fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_in);
    IM_UNUSED(fmt_out_size);
    IM_ASSERT((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_in + 1) < fmt_out_size); // Format is too long, let us know if this happens to you!
    while (fmt_in < fmt_end) {
        char c = *fmt_in++;
        if (c != '\'' && c != '$' && c != '_') // Custom flags provided by stb_sprintf.h. POSIX 2008 also supports '.
            *(fmt_out++) = c;
    }
    *fmt_out = 0; // Zero-terminate
}

// - For scanning we need to remove all width and precision fields and flags "%+3.7f" -> "%f". BUT don't strip types like "%I64d" which includes digits. !
// "%07I64d" -> "%I64d"
const char *ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(const char *fmt_in, char *fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size)
{
    const char *fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_in);
    const char *fmt_out_begin = fmt_out;
    IM_UNUSED(fmt_out_size);
    IM_ASSERT((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_in + 1) < fmt_out_size); // Format is too long, let us know if this happens to you!
    bool has_type = false;
    while (fmt_in < fmt_end) {
        char c = *fmt_in++;
        if (!has_type && ((c >= '0' && c <= '9') || c == '.' || c == '+' || c == '#'))
            continue;
        has_type |= ((c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') || (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')); // Stop skipping digits
        if (c != '\'' && c != '$' && c != '_') // Custom flags provided by stb_sprintf.h. POSIX 2008 also supports '.
            *(fmt_out++) = c;
    }
    *fmt_out = 0; // Zero-terminate
    return fmt_out_begin;
}

template<typename TYPE>
static const char *ImAtoi(const char *src, TYPE *output)
{
    int negative = 0;
    if (*src == '-') {
        negative = 1;
        src++;
    }
    if (*src == '+') {
        src++;
    }
    TYPE v = 0;
    while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
        v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
    *output = negative ? -v : v;
    return src;
}

// Parse display precision back from the display format string
// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char *fmt, int default_precision)
{
    fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return default_precision;
    fmt++;
    while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
        fmt++;
    int precision = INT_MAX;
    if (*fmt == '.') {
        fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
        if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
            precision = default_precision;
    }
    if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
        precision = -1;
    if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
        precision = -1;
    return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
}

// Create text input in place of another active widget (e.g. used when doing a CTRL+Click on drag/slider widgets)
// FIXME: Facilitate using this in variety of other situations.
bool ImGui::TempInputText(const ImRect &bb, ImGuiID id, const char *label, char *buf, int buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    // On the first frame, g.TempInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id.
    // We clear ActiveID on the first frame to allow the InputText() taking it back.
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const bool init = (g.TempInputId != id);
    if (init)
        ClearActiveID();

    g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
    bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, buf_size, bb.GetSize(), flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem);
    if (init) {
        // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget, we expect it to take the active id.
        IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id);
        g.TempInputId = g.ActiveId;
    }
    return value_changed;
}

static inline ImGuiInputTextFlags InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(ImGuiDataType data_type, const char *format)
{
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        return ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    const char format_last_char = format[0] ? format[strlen(format) - 1] : 0;
    return (format_last_char == 'x' || format_last_char == 'X') ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
}

// Note that Drag/Slider functions are only forwarding the min/max values clamping values if the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp flag is set!
// This is intended: this way we allow CTRL+Click manual input to set a value out of bounds, for maximum flexibility.
// However this may not be ideal for all uses, as some user code may break on out of bound values.
bool ImGui::TempInputScalar(const ImRect &bb,
                            ImGuiID id,
                            const char *label,
                            ImGuiDataType data_type,
                            void *p_data,
                            const char *format,
                            const void *p_clamp_min,
                            const void *p_clamp_max)
{
    // FIXME: May need to clarify display behavior if format doesn't contain %.
    // "%d" -> "%d" / "There are %d items" -> "%d" / "items" -> "%d" (fallback). Also see #6405
    const ImGuiDataTypeInfo *type_info = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type);
    char fmt_buf[32];
    char data_buf[32];
    format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
    if (format[0] == 0)
        format = type_info->PrintFmt;
    DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
    ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);

    ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited;
    flags |= InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(data_type, format);

    bool value_changed = false;
    if (TempInputText(bb, id, label, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), flags)) {
        // Backup old value
        size_t data_type_size = type_info->Size;
        ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage data_backup;
        memcpy(&data_backup, p_data, data_type_size);

        // Apply new value (or operations) then clamp
        DataTypeApplyFromText(data_buf, data_type, p_data, format);
        if (p_clamp_min || p_clamp_max) {
            if (p_clamp_min && p_clamp_max && DataTypeCompare(data_type, p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max) > 0)
                ImSwap(p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max);
            DataTypeClamp(data_type, p_data, p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max);
        }

        // Only mark as edited if new value is different
        value_changed = memcmp(&data_backup, p_data, data_type_size) != 0;
        if (value_changed)
            MarkItemEdited(id);
    }
    return value_changed;
}

// Note: p_data, p_step, p_step_fast are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For an Input widget, p_step and p_step_fast are optional.
// Read code of e.g. InputFloat(), InputInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char *label,
                        ImGuiDataType data_type,
                        void *p_data,
                        const void *p_step,
                        const void *p_step_fast,
                        const char *format,
                        ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;

    char buf[64];
    DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, p_data, format);

    // Testing ActiveId as a minor optimization as filtering is not needed until active
    if (g.ActiveId == 0 && (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
        flags |= InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(data_type, format);
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll
        | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited; // We call MarkItemEdited() ourselves by comparing the actual data rather than the string.

    bool value_changed = false;
    if (p_step == NULL) {
        if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags))
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyFromText(buf, data_type, p_data, format);
    } else {
        const float button_size = GetFrameHeight();

        BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
        PushID(label);
        SetNextItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
        if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyFromText(buf, data_type, p_data, format);
        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable);

        // Step buttons
        const ImVec2 backup_frame_padding = style.FramePadding;
        style.FramePadding.x = style.FramePadding.y;
        ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups;
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
            BeginDisabled();
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags)) {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags)) {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
            EndDisabled();

        const char *label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_end) {
            SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextEx(label, label_end);
        }
        style.FramePadding = backup_frame_padding;

        PopID();
        EndGroup();
    }
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char *label,
                         ImGuiDataType data_type,
                         void *p_data,
                         int components,
                         const void *p_step,
                         const void *p_step_fast,
                         const char *format,
                         ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++) {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= InputScalar("", data_type, p_data, p_step, p_step_fast, format, flags);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        p_data = (void *)((char *)p_data + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    const char *label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end) {
        SameLine(0.0f, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char *label, float *v, float step, float step_fast, const char *format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label,
                       ImGuiDataType_Float,
                       (void *)v,
                       (void *)(step > 0.0f ? &step : NULL),
                       (void *)(step_fast > 0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL),
                       format,
                       flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char *label, float v[2], const char *format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char *label, float v[3], const char *format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char *label, float v[4], const char *format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt(const char *label, int *v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle
    // prefixes.
    const char *format = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void *)v, (void *)(step > 0 ? &step : NULL), (void *)(step_fast > 0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char *label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char *label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char *label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char *label, double *v, double step, double step_fast, const char *format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label,
                       ImGuiDataType_Double,
                       (void *)v,
                       (void *)(step > 0.0 ? &step : NULL),
                       (void *)(step_fast > 0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL),
                       format,
                       flags);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline, InputTextWithHint
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - InputText()
// - InputTextWithHint()
// - InputTextMultiline()
// - InputTextGetCharInfo() [Internal]
// - InputTextReindexLines() [Internal]
// - InputTextReindexLinesRange() [Internal]
// - InputTextEx() [Internal]
// - DebugNodeInputTextState() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::InputText(const char *label, char *buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void *user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char *label,
                               char *buf,
                               size_t buf_size,
                               const ImVec2 &size,
                               ImGuiInputTextFlags flags,
                               ImGuiInputTextCallback callback,
                               void *user_data)
{
    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextWithHint(const char *label,
                              const char *hint,
                              char *buf,
                              size_t buf_size,
                              ImGuiInputTextFlags flags,
                              ImGuiInputTextCallback callback,
                              void *user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline() or  InputTextEx() manually if you need multi-line + hint.
    return InputTextEx(label, hint, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char *text_begin, const char **out_text_end)
{
    int line_count = 0;
    const char *s = text_begin;
    while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
        if (c == '\n')
            line_count++;
    s--;
    if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
        line_count++;
    *out_text_end = s;
    return line_count;
}

static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImGuiContext *ctx,
                                     const ImWchar *text_begin,
                                     const ImWchar *text_end,
                                     const ImWchar **remaining,
                                     ImVec2 *out_offset,
                                     bool stop_on_new_line)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *ctx;
    ImFont *font = g.Font;
    const float line_height = g.FontSize;
    const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize;

    ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0, 0);
    float line_width = 0.0f;

    const ImWchar *s = text_begin;
    while (s < text_end) {
        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
        if (c == '\n') {
            text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
            text_size.y += line_height;
            line_width = 0.0f;
            if (stop_on_new_line)
                break;
            continue;
        }
        if (c == '\r')
            continue;

        const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)c) * scale;
        line_width += char_width;
    }

    if (text_size.x < line_width)
        text_size.x = line_width;

    if (out_offset)
        *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height); // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n

    if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f) // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
        text_size.y += line_height;

    if (remaining)
        *remaining = s;

    return text_size;
}

// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and
// wchar)
namespace ImStb
{

static int STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const ImGuiInputTextState *obj)
{
    return obj->CurLenW;
}
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    return obj->TextW[idx];
}
static float STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx)
{
    ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx + char_idx];
    if (c == '\n')
        return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE;
    ImGuiContext &g = *obj->Ctx;
    return g.Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (g.FontSize / g.Font->FontSize);
}
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key)
{
    return key >= 0x200000 ? 0 : key;
}
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
static void STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow *r, ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int line_start_idx)
{
    const ImWchar *text = obj->TextW.Data;
    const ImWchar *text_remaining = NULL;
    const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(obj->Ctx, text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
    r->x0 = 0.0f;
    r->x1 = size.x;
    r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
    r->ymin = 0.0f;
    r->ymax = size.y;
    r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
}

static bool is_separator(unsigned int c)
{
    return c == ',' || c == ';' || c == '(' || c == ')' || c == '{' || c == '}' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '|' || c == '\n' || c == '\r' || c == '.'
        || c == '!';
}

static int is_word_boundary_from_right(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    // When ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password is set, we don't want actions such as CTRL+Arrow to leak the fact that underlying data are blanks or separators.
    if ((obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) || idx <= 0)
        return 0;

    bool prev_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx - 1]);
    bool prev_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx - 1]);
    bool curr_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx]);
    bool curr_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx]);
    return ((prev_white || prev_separ) && !(curr_separ || curr_white)) || (curr_separ && !prev_separ);
}
static int is_word_boundary_from_left(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    if ((obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) || idx <= 0)
        return 0;

    bool prev_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx]);
    bool prev_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx]);
    bool curr_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx - 1]);
    bool curr_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx - 1]);
    return ((prev_white) && !(curr_separ || curr_white)) || (curr_separ && !prev_separ);
}
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    idx--;
    while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx))
        idx--;
    return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx;
}
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    idx++;
    int len = obj->CurLenW;
    while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx))
        idx++;
    return idx > len ? len : idx;
}
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_WIN(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    idx++;
    int len = obj->CurLenW;
    while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx))
        idx++;
    return idx > len ? len : idx;
}
static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int idx)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *obj->Ctx;
    if (g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors)
        return STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(obj, idx);
    else
        return STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_WIN(obj, idx);
}
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL

static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int pos, int n)
{
    ImWchar *dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos;

    // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
    obj->Edited = true;
    obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
    obj->CurLenW -= n;

    // Offset remaining text (FIXME-OPT: Use memmove)
    const ImWchar *src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n;
    while (ImWchar c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';
}

static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(ImGuiInputTextState *obj, int pos, const ImWchar *new_text, int new_text_len)
{
    const bool is_resizable = (obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    const int text_len = obj->CurLenW;
    IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);

    const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
    if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA))
        return false;

    // Grow internal buffer if needed
    if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size) {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return false;
        IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size);
        obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1);
    }

    ImWchar *text = obj->TextW.Data;
    if (pos != text_len)
        memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
    memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));

    obj->Edited = true;
    obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
    obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
    obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';

    return true;
}

// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT 0x200000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT 0x200001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP 0x200002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN 0x200003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART 0x200004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND 0x200005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART 0x200006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND 0x200007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE 0x200008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE 0x200009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO 0x20000A // keyboard input to perform undo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO 0x20000B // keyboard input to perform redo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT 0x20000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT 0x20000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP 0x20000E // keyboard input to move cursor up a page
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN 0x20000F // keyboard input to move cursor down a page
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT 0x400000

#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove memmove
#include <stb_textedit.h>

// stb_textedit internally allows for a single undo record to do addition and deletion, but somehow, calling
// the stb_textedit_paste() function creates two separate records, so we perform it manually. (FIXME: Report to nothings/stb?)
static void stb_textedit_replace(ImGuiInputTextState *str, STB_TexteditState *state, const STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int text_len)
{
    stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, 0, str->CurLenW, text_len);
    ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, 0, str->CurLenW);
    state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
    if (text_len <= 0)
        return;
    if (ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, 0, text, text_len)) {
        state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = text_len;
        state->has_preferred_x = 0;
        return;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0); // Failed to insert character, normally shouldn't happen because of how we currently use stb_textedit_replace()
}

} // namespace ImStb

void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(int key)
{
    stb_textedit_key(this, &Stb, key);
    CursorFollow = true;
    CursorAnimReset();
}

ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData()
{
    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
}

// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count)
{
    IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
    char *dst = Buf + pos;
    const char *src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
    while (char c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';

    if (CursorPos >= pos + bytes_count)
        CursorPos -= bytes_count;
    else if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos = pos;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
}

void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, const char *new_text, const char *new_text_end)
{
    // Accept null ranges
    if (new_text == new_text_end)
        return;

    const bool is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
    if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize) {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return;

        // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the mildly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer altogether!)
        ImGuiContext &g = *Ctx;
        ImGuiInputTextState *edit_state = &g.InputTextState;
        IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID);
        IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TextA.Data);
        int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1;
        edit_state->TextA.reserve(new_buf_size + 1);
        Buf = edit_state->TextA.Data;
        BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size;
    }

    if (BufTextLen != pos)
        memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
    memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
    Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';

    if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos += new_text_len;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen += new_text_len;
}

// Return false to discard a character.
static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(ImGuiContext *ctx,
                                     unsigned int *p_char,
                                     ImGuiInputTextFlags flags,
                                     ImGuiInputTextCallback callback,
                                     void *user_data,
                                     ImGuiInputSource input_source)
{
    IM_ASSERT(input_source == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || input_source == ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard);
    unsigned int c = *p_char;

    // Filter non-printable (NB: isprint is unreliable! see #2467)
    bool apply_named_filters = true;
    if (c < 0x20) {
        bool pass = false;
        pass |=
            (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // Note that an Enter KEY will emit \r and be ignored (we poll for KEY in InputText() code)
        pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
        if (!pass)
            return false;
        apply_named_filters = false; // Override named filters below so newline and tabs can still be inserted.
    }

    if (input_source != ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard) {
        // We ignore Ascii representation of delete (emitted from Backspace on OSX, see #2578, #2817)
        if (c == 127)
            return false;

        // Filter private Unicode range. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys (FIXME)
        if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF)
            return false;
    }

    // Filter Unicode ranges we are not handling in this build
    if (c > IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX)
        return false;

    // Generic named filters
    if (apply_named_filters
        && (flags
            & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank
               | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))) {
        // The libc allows overriding locale, with e.g. 'setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, "de_DE.UTF-8");' which affect the output/input of printf/scanf to use e.g. ','
        // instead of '.'. The standard mandate that programs starts in the "C" locale where the decimal point is '.'. We don't really intend to provide
        // widespread support for it, but out of empathy for people stuck with using odd API, we support the bare minimum aka overriding the decimal point.
        // Change the default decimal_point with:
        //   ImGui::GetIO()->PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint = *localeconv()->decimal_point;
        // Users of non-default decimal point (in particular ',') may be affected by word-selection logic
        // (is_word_boundary_from_right/is_word_boundary_from_left) functions.
        ImGuiContext &g = *ctx;
        const unsigned c_decimal_point = (unsigned int)g.IO.PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint;
        if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))
            if (c == '.' || c == ',')
                c = c_decimal_point;

        // Full-width -> half-width conversion for numeric fields (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Halfwidth_and_Fullwidth_Forms_(Unicode_block)
        // While this is mostly convenient, this has the side-effect for uninformed users accidentally inputting full-width characters that they may
        // scratch their head as to why it works in numerical fields vs in generic text fields it would require support in the font.
        if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal))
            if (c >= 0xFF01 && c <= 0xFF5E)
                c = c - 0xFF01 + 0x21;

        // Allow 0-9 . - + * /
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != c_decimal_point) && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
                return false;

        // Allow 0-9 . - + * / e E
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != c_decimal_point) && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
                return false;

        // Allow 0-9 a-F A-F
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
                return false;

        // Turn a-z into A-Z
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
            if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
                c += (unsigned int)('A' - 'a');

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
            if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
                return false;

        *p_char = c;
    }

    // Custom callback filter
    if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter) {
        ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
        callback_data.Ctx = &g;
        callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
        callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
        callback_data.Flags = flags;
        callback_data.UserData = user_data;
        if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
            return false;
        *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
        if (!callback_data.EventChar)
            return false;
    }

    return true;
}

// Find the shortest single replacement we can make to get the new text from the old text.
// Important: needs to be run before TextW is rewritten with the new characters because calling STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR() at the end.
// FIXME: Ideally we should transition toward (1) making InsertChars()/DeleteChars() update undo-stack (2) discourage (and keep reconcile) or obsolete (and
// remove reconcile) accessing buffer directly.
static void InputTextReconcileUndoStateAfterUserCallback(ImGuiInputTextState *state, const char *new_buf_a, int new_length_a)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImWchar *old_buf = state->TextW.Data;
    const int old_length = state->CurLenW;
    const int new_length = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(new_buf_a, new_buf_a + new_length_a);
    g.TempBuffer.reserve_discard((new_length + 1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
    ImWchar *new_buf = (ImWchar *)(void *)g.TempBuffer.Data;
    ImTextStrFromUtf8(new_buf, new_length + 1, new_buf_a, new_buf_a + new_length_a);

    const int shorter_length = ImMin(old_length, new_length);
    int first_diff;
    for (first_diff = 0; first_diff < shorter_length; first_diff++)
        if (old_buf[first_diff] != new_buf[first_diff])
            break;
    if (first_diff == old_length && first_diff == new_length)
        return;

    int old_last_diff = old_length - 1;
    int new_last_diff = new_length - 1;
    for (; old_last_diff >= first_diff && new_last_diff >= first_diff; old_last_diff--, new_last_diff--)
        if (old_buf[old_last_diff] != new_buf[new_last_diff])
            break;

    const int insert_len = new_last_diff - first_diff + 1;
    const int delete_len = old_last_diff - first_diff + 1;
    if (insert_len > 0 || delete_len > 0)
        if (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->Stb.undostate, first_diff, delete_len, insert_len))
            for (int i = 0; i < delete_len; i++)
                p[i] = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, first_diff + i);
}

// As InputText() retain textual data and we currently provide a path for user to not retain it (via local variables)
// we need some form of hook to reapply data back to user buffer on deactivation frame. (#4714)
// It would be more desirable that we discourage users from taking advantage of the "user not retaining data" trick,
// but that more likely be attractive when we do have _NoLiveEdit flag available.
void ImGui::InputTextDeactivateHook(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiInputTextState *state = &g.InputTextState;
    if (id == 0 || state->ID != id)
        return;
    g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ID = state->ID;
    if (state->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) {
        g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.resize(0); // In theory this data won't be used, but clear to be neat.
    } else {
        IM_ASSERT(state->TextA.Data != 0);
        g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.resize(state->CurLenA + 1);
        memcpy(g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Data, state->TextA.Data, state->CurLenA + 1);
    }
}

// Edit a string of text
// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!".
//   This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match
//   Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator.
// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect.
// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h
// (FIXME: Rather confusing and messy function, among the worse part of our codebase, expecting to rewrite a V2 at some point.. Partly because we are
//  doing UTF8 > U16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to easily interface with stb_textedit. Ideally should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See
//  https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char *label,
                        const char *hint,
                        char *buf,
                        int buf_size,
                        const ImVec2 &size_arg,
                        ImGuiInputTextFlags flags,
                        ImGuiInputTextCallback callback,
                        void *callback_user_data)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(buf != NULL && buf_size >= 0);
    IM_ASSERT(
        !((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline))); // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
    IM_ASSERT(
        !((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiIO &io = g.IO;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    const bool RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE = false;
    const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
    const bool is_readonly = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) != 0;
    const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
    const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
    const bool is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    if (is_resizable)
        IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag!

    if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope (including the scrollbar)
        BeginGroup();
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImVec2 frame_size =
        CalcItemSize(size_arg,
                     CalcItemWidth(),
                     (is_multiline ? g.FontSize * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
    const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(frame_size.x + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), frame_size.y);

    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Min + total_size);

    ImGuiWindow *draw_window = window;
    ImVec2 inner_size = frame_size;
    ImGuiItemStatusFlags item_status_flags = 0;
    ImGuiLastItemData item_data_backup;
    if (is_multiline) {
        ImVec2 backup_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable)) {
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        item_status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags;
        item_data_backup = g.LastItemData;
        window->DC.CursorPos = backup_pos;

        // We reproduce the contents of BeginChildFrame() in order to provide 'label' so our window internal data are easier to read/debug.
        // FIXME-NAV: Pressing NavActivate will trigger general child activation right before triggering our own below. Harmless but bizarre.
        PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Ensure no clip rect so mouse hover can reach FramePadding edges
        bool child_visible = BeginChildEx(label, id, frame_bb.GetSize(), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
        PopStyleVar(3);
        PopStyleColor();
        if (!child_visible) {
            EndChild();
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        draw_window = g.CurrentWindow; // Child window
        draw_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext |=
            (1 << draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrent); // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight so we can "enter" into it.
        draw_window->DC.CursorPos += style.FramePadding;
        inner_size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
    } else {
        // Support for internal ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem flag, which could be redesigned as an ItemFlags if needed (with test performed in ItemAdd)
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem))
            if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable))
                return false;
        item_status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags;
    }
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags);
    if (hovered)
        g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;

    // We are only allowed to access the state if we are already the active widget.
    ImGuiInputTextState *state = GetInputTextState(id);

    const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = (item_status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0;
    const bool input_requested_by_nav = (g.ActiveId != id)
        && ((g.NavActivateId == id) && ((g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput) || (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard)));

    const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
    const bool user_scroll_finish =
        is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);
    const bool user_scroll_active = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);
    bool clear_active_id = false;
    bool select_all = false;

    float scroll_y = is_multiline ? draw_window->Scroll.y : FLT_MAX;

    const bool init_changed_specs = (state != NULL && state->Stb.single_line != !is_multiline); // state != NULL means its our state.
    const bool init_make_active = (user_clicked || user_scroll_finish || input_requested_by_nav || input_requested_by_tabbing);
    const bool init_state = (init_make_active || user_scroll_active);
    if ((init_state && g.ActiveId != id) || init_changed_specs) {
        // Access state even if we don't own it yet.
        state = &g.InputTextState;
        state->CursorAnimReset();

        // Backup state of deactivating item so they'll have a chance to do a write to output buffer on the same frame they report IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit
        // (#4714)
        InputTextDeactivateHook(state->ID);

        // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
        // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
        const int buf_len = (int)strlen(buf);
        state->InitialTextA.resize(buf_len + 1); // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
        memcpy(state->InitialTextA.Data, buf, buf_len + 1);

        // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
        // FIXME: Since we reworked this on 2022/06, may want to differenciate recycle_cursor vs recycle_undostate?
        bool recycle_state = (state->ID == id && !init_changed_specs);
        if (recycle_state && (state->CurLenA != buf_len || (state->TextAIsValid && strncmp(state->TextA.Data, buf, buf_len) != 0)))
            recycle_state = false;

        // Start edition
        const char *buf_end = NULL;
        state->ID = id;
        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1); // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
        state->TextA.resize(0);
        state->TextAIsValid = false; // TextA is not valid yet (we will display buf until then)
        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
        state->CurLenA =
            (int)(buf_end - buf); // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.

        if (recycle_state) {
            // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
            // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
            state->CursorClamp();
        } else {
            state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
            stb_textedit_initialize_state(&state->Stb, !is_multiline);
        }

        if (!is_multiline) {
            if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll)
                select_all = true;
            if (input_requested_by_nav && (!recycle_state || !(g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState)))
                select_all = true;
            if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl))
                select_all = true;
        }

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite)
            state->Stb.insert_mode = 1; // stb field name is indeed incorrect (see #2863)
    }

    const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
    if (g.ActiveId != id && init_make_active) {
        IM_ASSERT(state && state->ID == id);
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
    }
    if (g.ActiveId == id) {
        // Declare some inputs, the other are registered and polled via Shortcut() routing system.
        if (user_clicked)
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id);
        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
        if (is_multiline || (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
        SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_Home, id);
        SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_End, id);
        if (is_multiline) {
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_PageUp, id);
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_PageDown, id);
        }
        if (is_osx)
            SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Alt, id);
        if (flags
            & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)) // Disable keyboard tabbing out as we will use the \t character.
            SetShortcutRouting(ImGuiKey_Tab, id);
    }

    // We have an edge case if ActiveId was set through another widget (e.g. widget being swapped), clear id immediately (don't wait until the end of the
    // function)
    if (g.ActiveId == id && state == NULL)
        ClearActiveID();

    // Release focus when we click outside
    if (g.ActiveId == id && io.MouseClicked[0] && !init_state && !init_make_active) //-V560
        clear_active_id = true;

    // Lock the decision of whether we are going to take the path displaying the cursor or selection
    bool render_cursor = (g.ActiveId == id) || (state && user_scroll_active);
    bool render_selection = state && (state->HasSelection() || select_all) && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
    bool value_changed = false;
    bool validated = false;

    // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
    // FIXME-OPT: Because our selection/cursor code currently needs the wide text we need to convert it when active, which is not ideal :(
    if (is_readonly && state != NULL && (render_cursor || render_selection)) {
        const char *buf_end = NULL;
        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);
        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
        state->CursorClamp();
        render_selection &= state->HasSelection();
    }

    // Select the buffer to render.
    const bool buf_display_from_state = (render_cursor || render_selection || g.ActiveId == id) && !is_readonly && state && state->TextAIsValid;
    const bool is_displaying_hint = (hint != NULL && (buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf)[0] == 0);

    // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint) {
        const ImFontGlyph *glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
        ImFont *password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
        password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
        password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
        password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
        password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
        password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
        password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
        password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
        IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
        PushFont(password_font);
    }

    // Process mouse inputs and character inputs
    int backup_current_text_length = 0;
    if (g.ActiveId == id) {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        backup_current_text_length = state->CurLenA;
        state->Edited = false;
        state->BufCapacityA = buf_size;
        state->Flags = flags;

        // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
        // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];

        // Edit in progress
        const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + state->ScrollX;
        const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y) : (g.FontSize * 0.5f));

        if (select_all) {
            state->SelectAll();
            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
        } else if (hovered && io.MouseClickedCount[0] >= 2 && !io.KeyShift) {
            stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
            const int multiclick_count = (io.MouseClickedCount[0] - 2);
            if ((multiclick_count % 2) == 0) {
                // Double-click: Select word
                // We always use the "Mac" word advance for double-click select vs CTRL+Right which use the platform dependent variant:
                // FIXME: There are likely many ways to improve this behavior, but there's no "right" behavior (depends on use-case, software, OS)
                const bool is_bol = (state->Stb.cursor == 0) || ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, state->Stb.cursor - 1) == '\n';
                if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(&state->Stb) || !is_bol)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
                // state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(&state->Stb))
                    ImStb::stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(&state->Stb);
                state->Stb.cursor = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(state, state->Stb.cursor);
                state->Stb.select_end = state->Stb.cursor;
                ImStb::stb_textedit_clamp(state, &state->Stb);
            } else {
                // Triple-click: Select line
                const bool is_eol = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, state->Stb.cursor) == '\n';
                state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART);
                state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                if (!is_eol && is_multiline) {
                    ImSwap(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
                    state->Stb.cursor = state->Stb.select_end;
                }
                state->CursorFollow = false;
            }
            state->CursorAnimReset();
        } else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock) {
            if (hovered) {
                if (io.KeyShift)
                    stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
                else
                    stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
                state->CursorAnimReset();
            }
        } else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f)) {
            stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
            state->CursorAnimReset();
            state->CursorFollow = true;
        }
        if (state->SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = false;

        // We expect backends to emit a Tab key but some also emit a Tab character which we ignore (#2467, #1336)
        // (For Tab and Enter: Win32/SFML/Allegro are sending both keys and chars, GLFW and SDL are only sending keys. For Space they all send all threes)
        if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && Shortcut(ImGuiKey_Tab, id) && !is_readonly) {
            unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
            if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))
                state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
        }

        // Process regular text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
        // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
        const bool ignore_char_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
        if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0) {
            if (!ignore_char_inputs && !is_readonly && !input_requested_by_nav)
                for (int n = 0; n < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; n++) {
                    // Insert character if they pass filtering
                    unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputQueueCharacters[n];
                    if (c == '\t') // Skip Tab, see above.
                        continue;
                    if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))
                        state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
                }

            // Consume characters
            io.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
        }
    }

    // Process other shortcuts/key-presses
    bool revert_edit = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id) {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);

        const int row_count_per_page = ImMax((int)((inner_size.y - style.FramePadding.y) / g.FontSize), 1);
        // state->Stb.row_count_per_page = row_count_per_page;

        const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
        const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl; // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
        const bool is_startend_key_down =
            is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt; // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End

        // Using Shortcut() with ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused (default policy) to allow routing operations for other code (e.g. calling window trying to use
        // CTRL+A and CTRL+B: formet would be handled by InputText) Otherwise we could simply assume that we own the keys as we are active.
        const ImGuiInputFlags f_repeat = ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat;
        const bool is_cut = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_X, id, f_repeat) || Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Delete, id, f_repeat)) && !is_readonly
            && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
        const bool is_copy = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_C, id) || Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiKey_Insert, id)) && !is_password
            && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
        const bool is_paste =
            (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_V, id, f_repeat) || Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Insert, id, f_repeat)) && !is_readonly;
        const bool is_undo = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_Z, id, f_repeat)) && !is_readonly && is_undoable;
        const bool is_redo =
            (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_Y, id, f_repeat) || (is_osx && Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Z, id, f_repeat)))
            && !is_readonly && is_undoable;
        const bool is_select_all = Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_A, id);

        // We allow validate/cancel with Nav source (gamepad) to makes it easier to undo an accidental NavInput press with no keyboard wired, but otherwise it
        // isn't very useful.
        const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0;
        const bool is_enter_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter, true) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter, true);
        const bool is_gamepad_validate =
            nav_gamepad_active && (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate, false) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput, false));
        const bool is_cancel = Shortcut(ImGuiKey_Escape, id, f_repeat) || (nav_gamepad_active && Shortcut(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, id, f_repeat));

        // FIXME: Should use more Shortcut() and reduce IsKeyPressed()+SetKeyOwner(), but requires modifiers combination to be taken account of.
        if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow)) {
            state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down       ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART
                                     : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT
                                                            : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT)
                                | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_RightArrow)) {
            state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down       ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND
                                     : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT
                                                            : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT)
                                | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline) {
            if (io.KeyCtrl)
                SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f));
            else
                state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline) {
            if (io.KeyCtrl)
                SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY()));
            else
                state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp) && is_multiline) {
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP | k_mask);
            scroll_y -= row_count_per_page * g.FontSize;
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown) && is_multiline) {
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN | k_mask);
            scroll_y += row_count_per_page * g.FontSize;
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Home)) {
            state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_End)) {
            state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Delete) && !is_readonly && !is_cut) {
            if (!state->HasSelection()) {
                // OSX doesn't seem to have Super+Delete to delete until end-of-line, so we don't emulate that (as opposed to Super+Backspace)
                if (is_wordmove_key_down)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
            }
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask);
        } else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && !is_readonly) {
            if (!state->HasSelection()) {
                if (is_wordmove_key_down)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
            }
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
        } else if (is_enter_pressed || is_gamepad_validate) {
            // Determine if we turn Enter into a \n character
            bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
            if (!is_multiline || is_gamepad_validate || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl)) {
                validated = true;
                if (io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive && !is_multiline)
                    state->SelectAll(); // No need to scroll
                else
                    clear_active_id = true;
            } else if (!is_readonly) {
                unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))
                    state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
            }
        } else if (is_cancel) {
            if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll) {
                if (buf[0] != 0) {
                    revert_edit = true;
                } else {
                    render_cursor = render_selection = false;
                    clear_active_id = true;
                }
            } else {
                clear_active_id = revert_edit = true;
                render_cursor = render_selection = false;
            }
        } else if (is_undo || is_redo) {
            state->OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
            state->ClearSelection();
        } else if (is_select_all) {
            state->SelectAll();
            state->CursorFollow = true;
        } else if (is_cut || is_copy) {
            // Cut, Copy
            if (io.SetClipboardTextFn) {
                const int ib = state->HasSelection() ? ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : 0;
                const int ie = state->HasSelection() ? ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : state->CurLenW;
                const int clipboard_data_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie) + 1;
                char *clipboard_data = (char *)IM_ALLOC(clipboard_data_len * sizeof(char));
                ImTextStrToUtf8(clipboard_data, clipboard_data_len, state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie);
                SetClipboardText(clipboard_data);
                MemFree(clipboard_data);
            }
            if (is_cut) {
                if (!state->HasSelection())
                    state->SelectAll();
                state->CursorFollow = true;
                stb_textedit_cut(state, &state->Stb);
            }
        } else if (is_paste) {
            if (const char *clipboard = GetClipboardText()) {
                // Filter pasted buffer
                const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
                ImWchar *clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar *)IM_ALLOC((clipboard_len + 1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
                int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
                for (const char *s = clipboard; *s != 0;) {
                    unsigned int c;
                    s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
                    if (!InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard))
                        continue;
                    clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
                }
                clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
                if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
                {
                    stb_textedit_paste(state, &state->Stb, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
                    state->CursorFollow = true;
                }
                MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
            }
        }

        // Update render selection flag after events have been handled, so selection highlight can be displayed during the same frame.
        render_selection |= state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
    }

    // Process callbacks and apply result back to user's buffer.
    const char *apply_new_text = NULL;
    int apply_new_text_length = 0;
    if (g.ActiveId == id) {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        if (revert_edit && !is_readonly) {
            if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll) {
                // Clear input
                IM_ASSERT(buf[0] != 0);
                apply_new_text = "";
                apply_new_text_length = 0;
                value_changed = true;
                STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE empty_string;
                stb_textedit_replace(state, &state->Stb, &empty_string, 0);
            } else if (strcmp(buf, state->InitialTextA.Data) != 0) {
                // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
                // Push records into the undo stack so we can CTRL+Z the revert operation itself
                apply_new_text = state->InitialTextA.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = state->InitialTextA.Size - 1;
                value_changed = true;
                ImVector<ImWchar> w_text;
                if (apply_new_text_length > 0) {
                    w_text.resize(ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(apply_new_text, apply_new_text + apply_new_text_length) + 1);
                    ImTextStrFromUtf8(w_text.Data, w_text.Size, apply_new_text, apply_new_text + apply_new_text_length);
                }
                stb_textedit_replace(state, &state->Stb, w_text.Data, (apply_new_text_length > 0) ? (w_text.Size - 1) : 0);
            }
        }

        // Apply ASCII value
        if (!is_readonly) {
            state->TextAIsValid = true;
            state->TextA.resize(state->TextW.Size * 4 + 1);
            ImTextStrToUtf8(state->TextA.Data, state->TextA.Size, state->TextW.Data, NULL);
        }

        // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer
        // before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
        // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail.
        // This also allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage
        // (please note that if you use this property along ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize you can end up with your temporary string object
        // unnecessarily allocating once a frame, either store your string data, either if you don't then don't use ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize).
        const bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !revert_edit || (validated && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
        if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer) {
            // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
            // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
            // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
            // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.

            // User callback
            if ((flags
                 & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit
                    | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways))
                != 0) {
                IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);

                // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
                ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
                ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_None;
                if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && Shortcut(ImGuiKey_Tab, id)) {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
                } else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow)) {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
                } else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow)) {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
                } else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit) && state->Edited) {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit;
                } else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways) {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;
                }

                if (event_flag) {
                    ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                    callback_data.Ctx = &g;
                    callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
                    callback_data.Flags = flags;
                    callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;

                    char *callback_buf = is_readonly ? buf : state->TextA.Data;
                    callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
                    callback_data.Buf = callback_buf;
                    callback_data.BufTextLen = state->CurLenA;
                    callback_data.BufSize = state->BufCapacityA;
                    callback_data.BufDirty = false;

                    // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see
                    // https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
                    ImWchar *text = state->TextW.Data;
                    const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.cursor);
                    const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_start);
                    const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_end);

                    // Call user code
                    callback(&callback_data);

                    // Read back what user may have modified
                    callback_buf = is_readonly ? buf : state->TextA.Data; // Pointer may have been invalidated by a resize callback
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == callback_buf); // Invalid to modify those fields
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == state->BufCapacityA);
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
                    const bool buf_dirty = callback_data.BufDirty;
                    if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos || buf_dirty) {
                        state->Stb.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos);
                        state->CursorFollow = true;
                    }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start || buf_dirty) {
                        state->Stb.select_start = (callback_data.SelectionStart == callback_data.CursorPos)
                            ? state->Stb.cursor
                            : ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart);
                    }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end || buf_dirty) {
                        state->Stb.select_end = (callback_data.SelectionEnd == callback_data.SelectionStart)
                            ? state->Stb.select_start
                            : ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd);
                    }
                    if (buf_dirty) {
                        IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) == 0);
                        IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
                        InputTextReconcileUndoStateAfterUserCallback(
                            state,
                            callback_data.Buf,
                            callback_data
                                .BufTextLen); // FIXME: Move the rest of this block inside function and rename to InputTextReconcileStateAfterUserCallback() ?
                        if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable)
                            state->TextW.resize(state->TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length)); // Worse case scenario resize
                        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
                        state->CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen; // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
                        state->CursorAnimReset();
                    }
                }
            }

            // Will copy result string if modified
            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(state->TextA.Data, buf) != 0) {
                apply_new_text = state->TextA.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = state->CurLenA;
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
    }

    // Handle reapplying final data on deactivation (see InputTextDeactivateHook() for details)
    if (g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ID == id) {
        if (g.ActiveId != id && IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() && !is_readonly && strcmp(g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Data, buf) != 0) {
            apply_new_text = g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Data;
            apply_new_text_length = g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Size - 1;
            value_changed = true;
            // IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("InputText(): apply Deactivated data for 0x%08X: \"%.*s\".\n", id, apply_new_text_length, apply_new_text);
        }
        g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ID = 0;
    }

    // Copy result to user buffer. This can currently only happen when (g.ActiveId == id)
    if (apply_new_text != NULL) {
        // We cannot test for 'backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length' here because we have no guarantee that the size
        // of our owned buffer matches the size of the string object held by the user, and by design we allow InputText() to be used
        // without any storage on user's side.
        IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0);
        if (is_resizable) {
            ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
            callback_data.Ctx = &g;
            callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize;
            callback_data.Flags = flags;
            callback_data.Buf = buf;
            callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length;
            callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1);
            callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
            callback(&callback_data);
            buf = callback_data.Buf;
            buf_size = callback_data.BufSize;
            apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1);
            IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size);
        }
        // IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("InputText(\"%s\"): apply_new_text length %d\n", label, apply_new_text_length);

        // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size.
        ImStrncpy(buf, apply_new_text, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size));
    }

    // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value)
    // Otherwise request text input ahead for next frame.
    if (g.ActiveId == id && clear_active_id)
        ClearActiveID();
    else if (g.ActiveId == id)
        g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;

    // Render frame
    if (!is_multiline) {
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    }

    const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x,
                           frame_bb.Min.y,
                           frame_bb.Min.x + inner_size.x,
                           frame_bb.Min.y + inner_size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
    ImVec2 draw_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
    ImVec2 text_size(0.0f, 0.0f);

    // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line
    // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether.
    // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash.
    const int buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024;
    const char *buf_display = buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf; //-V595
    const char *buf_display_end = NULL; // We have specialized paths below for setting the length
    if (is_displaying_hint) {
        buf_display = hint;
        buf_display_end = hint + strlen(hint);
    }

    // Render text. We currently only render selection when the widget is active or while scrolling.
    // FIXME: We could remove the '&& render_cursor' to keep rendering selection when inactive.
    if (render_cursor || render_selection) {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        if (!is_displaying_hint)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;

        // Render text (with cursor and selection)
        // This is going to be messy. We need to:
        // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
        // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
        // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
        // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for
        // selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
        // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
        const ImWchar *text_begin = state->TextW.Data;
        ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;

        {
            // Find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' (slot 0) and 'select_start' (slot 1) positions.
            const ImWchar *searches_input_ptr[2] = {NULL, NULL};
            int searches_result_line_no[2] = {-1000, -1000};
            int searches_remaining = 0;
            if (render_cursor) {
                searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + state->Stb.cursor;
                searches_result_line_no[0] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }
            if (render_selection) {
                searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
                searches_result_line_no[1] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }

            // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
            // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
            searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
            int line_count = 0;
            // for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; (s = (const ImWchar*)wcschr((const wchar_t*)s, (wchar_t)'\n')) != NULL; s++)  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this
            // when wchar_t are 16-bit
            for (const ImWchar *s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
                if (*s == '\n') {
                    line_count++;
                    if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) {
                        searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count;
                        if (--searches_remaining <= 0)
                            break;
                    }
                    if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) {
                        searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count;
                        if (--searches_remaining <= 0)
                            break;
                    }
                }
            line_count++;
            if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1)
                searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count;
            if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1)
                searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count;

            // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
            cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
            cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[0] * g.FontSize;
            if (searches_result_line_no[1] >= 0) {
                select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
                select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[1] * g.FontSize;
            }

            // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
            if (is_multiline)
                text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
        }

        // Scroll
        if (render_cursor && state->CursorFollow) {
            // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
            if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll)) {
                const float scroll_increment_x = inner_size.x * 0.25f;
                const float visible_width = inner_size.x - style.FramePadding.x;
                if (cursor_offset.x < state->ScrollX)
                    state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x));
                else if (cursor_offset.x - visible_width >= state->ScrollX)
                    state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(cursor_offset.x - visible_width + scroll_increment_x);
            } else {
                state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
            }

            // Vertical scroll
            if (is_multiline) {
                // Test if cursor is vertically visible
                if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
                else if (cursor_offset.y - (inner_size.y - style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) >= scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - inner_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
                const float scroll_max_y = ImMax((text_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) - inner_size.y, 0.0f);
                scroll_y = ImClamp(scroll_y, 0.0f, scroll_max_y);
                draw_pos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y); // Manipulate cursor pos immediately avoid a frame of lag
                draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
            }

            state->CursorFollow = false;
        }

        // Draw selection
        const ImVec2 draw_scroll = ImVec2(state->ScrollX, 0.0f);
        if (render_selection) {
            const ImWchar *text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
            const ImWchar *text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);

            ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(
                ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg,
                render_cursor ? 1.0f
                              : 0.6f); // FIXME: current code flow mandate that render_cursor is always true here, we are leaving the transparent one for tests.
            float bg_offy_up =
                is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f; // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
            float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
            ImVec2 rect_pos = draw_pos + select_start_offset - draw_scroll;
            for (const ImWchar *p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end;) {
                if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
                    break;
                if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y) {
                    // p = (const ImWchar*)wmemchr((const wchar_t*)p, '\n', text_selected_end - p);  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit
                    // p = p ? p + 1 : text_selected_end;
                    while (p < text_selected_end)
                        if (*p++ == '\n')
                            break;
                } else {
                    ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
                    if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f)
                        rect_size.x = IM_FLOOR(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
                    ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos + ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
                    rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
                    if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                        draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
                }
                rect_pos.x = draw_pos.x - draw_scroll.x;
                rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
            }
        }

        // We test for 'buf_display_max_length' as a way to avoid some pathological cases (e.g. single-line 1 MB string) which would make ImDrawList crash.
        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length) {
            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
            draw_window->DrawList
                ->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos - draw_scroll, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
        }

        // Draw blinking cursor
        if (render_cursor) {
            state->CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
            bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (state->CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(state->CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
            ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = ImFloor(draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll);
            ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize + 0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x + 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - 1.5f);
            if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));

            // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
            if (!is_readonly) {
                g.PlatformImeData.WantVisible = true;
                g.PlatformImeData.InputPos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
                g.PlatformImeData.InputLineHeight = g.FontSize;
            }
        }
    } else {
        // Render text only (no selection, no cursor)
        if (is_multiline)
            text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_display_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
        else if (!is_displaying_hint && g.ActiveId == id)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;
        else if (!is_displaying_hint)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display);

        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length) {
            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
        }
    }

    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
        PopFont();

    if (is_multiline) {
        // For focus requests to work on our multiline we need to ensure our child ItemAdd() call specifies the ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable (ref issue #4761)...
        Dummy(ImVec2(text_size.x, text_size.y + style.FramePadding.y));
        g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable | ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop;
        EndChild();
        item_data_backup.StatusFlags |= (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow);

        // ...and then we need to undo the group overriding last item data, which gets a bit messy as EndGroup() tries to forward scrollbar being active...
        // FIXME: This quite messy/tricky, should attempt to get rid of the child window.
        EndGroup();
        if (g.LastItemData.ID == 0) {
            g.LastItemData.ID = id;
            g.LastItemData.InFlags = item_data_backup.InFlags;
            g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = item_data_backup.StatusFlags;
        }
    }

    // Log as text
    if (g.LogEnabled && (!is_password || is_displaying_hint)) {
        LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
        LogRenderedText(&draw_pos, buf_display, buf_display_end);
    }

    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if (value_changed && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited))
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable);
    if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
        return validated;
    else
        return value_changed;
}

void ImGui::DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState *state)
{
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImStb::STB_TexteditState *stb_state = &state->Stb;
    ImStb::StbUndoState *undo_state = &stb_state->undostate;
    Text("ID: 0x%08X, ActiveID: 0x%08X", state->ID, g.ActiveId);
    DebugLocateItemOnHover(state->ID);
    Text("CurLenW: %d, CurLenA: %d, Cursor: %d, Selection: %d..%d",
         state->CurLenW,
         state->CurLenA,
         stb_state->cursor,
         stb_state->select_start,
         stb_state->select_end);
    Text("has_preferred_x: %d (%.2f)", stb_state->has_preferred_x, stb_state->preferred_x);
    Text("undo_point: %d, redo_point: %d, undo_char_point: %d, redo_char_point: %d",
         undo_state->undo_point,
         undo_state->redo_point,
         undo_state->undo_char_point,
         undo_state->redo_char_point);
    if (BeginChild("undopoints", ImVec2(0.0f, GetTextLineHeight() * 15), true)) // Visualize undo state
    {
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
        for (int n = 0; n < STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT; n++) {
            ImStb::StbUndoRecord *undo_rec = &undo_state->undo_rec[n];
            const char undo_rec_type = (n < undo_state->undo_point) ? 'u' : (n >= undo_state->redo_point) ? 'r' : ' ';
            if (undo_rec_type == ' ')
                BeginDisabled();
            char buf[64] = "";
            if (undo_rec_type != ' ' && undo_rec->char_storage != -1)
                ImTextStrToUtf8(buf,
                                IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf),
                                undo_state->undo_char + undo_rec->char_storage,
                                undo_state->undo_char + undo_rec->char_storage + undo_rec->insert_length);
            Text("%c [%02d] where %03d, insert %03d, delete %03d, char_storage %03d \"%s\"",
                 undo_rec_type,
                 n,
                 undo_rec->where,
                 undo_rec->insert_length,
                 undo_rec->delete_length,
                 undo_rec->char_storage,
                 buf);
            if (undo_rec_type == ' ')
                EndDisabled();
        }
        PopStyleVar();
    }
    EndChild();
#else
    IM_UNUSED(state);
#endif
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ColorEdit3()
// - ColorEdit4()
// - ColorPicker3()
// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() [Internal]
// - ColorPicker4()
// - ColorButton()
// - SetColorEditOptions()
// - ColorTooltip() [Internal]
// - ColorEditOptionsPopup() [Internal]
// - ColorPickerOptionsPopup() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char *label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
}

static void ColorEditRestoreH(const float *col, float *H)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.ColorEditCurrentID != 0);
    if (g.ColorEditSavedID != g.ColorEditCurrentID || g.ColorEditSavedColor != ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0)))
        return;
    *H = g.ColorEditSavedHue;
}

// ColorEdit supports RGB and HSV inputs. In case of RGB input resulting color may have undefined hue and/or saturation.
// Since widget displays both RGB and HSV values we must preserve hue and saturation to prevent these values resetting.
static void ColorEditRestoreHS(const float *col, float *H, float *S, float *V)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.ColorEditCurrentID != 0);
    if (g.ColorEditSavedID != g.ColorEditCurrentID || g.ColorEditSavedColor != ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0)))
        return;

    // When S == 0, H is undefined.
    // When H == 1 it wraps around to 0.
    if (*S == 0.0f || (*H == 0.0f && g.ColorEditSavedHue == 1))
        *H = g.ColorEditSavedHue;

    // When V == 0, S is undefined.
    if (*V == 0.0f)
        *S = g.ColorEditSavedSat;
}

// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// With typical options: Left-click on color square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to
// go to next item.
bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char *label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const float w_full = CalcItemWidth();
    const float w_button = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    const float w_inputs = w_full - w_button;
    const char *label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    const bool set_current_color_edit_id = (g.ColorEditCurrentID == 0);
    if (set_current_color_edit_id)
        g.ColorEditCurrentID = window->IDStack.back();

    // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
    const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
        flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;

    // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_);
    flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions
              & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_));
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected

    const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
    const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
    const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3;

    // Convert to the formats we need
    float f[4] = {col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f};
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) {
        // Hue is lost when converting from grayscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
        ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &f[0], &f[1], &f[2]);
    }
    int i[4] = {IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3])};

    bool value_changed = false;
    bool value_changed_as_float = false;

    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const float inputs_offset_x = (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left) ? w_button : 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + inputs_offset_x;

    if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0) {
        // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
        const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components));
        const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)));

        const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
        static const char *ids[4] = {"##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W"};
        static const char *fmt_table_int[3][4] = {
            {"%3d", "%3d", "%3d", "%3d"}, // Short display
            {"R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d"}, // Long display for RGBA
            {"H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d"} // Long display for HSVA
        };
        static const char *fmt_table_float[3][4] = {
            {"%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f"}, // Short display
            {"R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f"}, // Long display for RGBA
            {"H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f"} // Long display for HSVA
        };
        const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) ? 2 : 1;

        for (int n = 0; n < components; n++) {
            if (n > 0)
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            SetNextItemWidth((n + 1 < components) ? w_item_one : w_item_last);

            // FIXME: When ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR flag is passed HS values snap in weird ways when SV values go below 0.
            if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) {
                value_changed |= DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f / 255.0f, 0.0f, hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
                value_changed_as_float |= value_changed;
            } else {
                value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, 0, hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
            }
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
                OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
        }
    } else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0) {
        // RGB Hexadecimal Input
        char buf[64];
        if (alpha)
            ImFormatString(buf,
                           IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf),
                           "#%02X%02X%02X%02X",
                           ImClamp(i[0], 0, 255),
                           ImClamp(i[1], 0, 255),
                           ImClamp(i[2], 0, 255),
                           ImClamp(i[3], 0, 255));
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[1], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[2], 0, 255));
        SetNextItemWidth(w_inputs);
        if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)) {
            value_changed = true;
            char *p = buf;
            while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
                p++;
            i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = 0;
            i[3] = 0xFF; // alpha default to 255 is not parsed by scanf (e.g. inputting #FFFFFF omitting alpha)
            int r;
            if (alpha)
                r = sscanf(p,
                           "%02X%02X%02X%02X",
                           (unsigned int *)&i[0],
                           (unsigned int *)&i[1],
                           (unsigned int *)&i[2],
                           (unsigned int *)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
            else
                r = sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int *)&i[0], (unsigned int *)&i[1], (unsigned int *)&i[2]);
            IM_UNUSED(r); // Fixes C6031: Return value ignored: 'sscanf'.
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
    }

    ImGuiWindow *picker_active_window = NULL;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview)) {
        const float button_offset_x =
            ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) || (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)) ? 0.0f : w_inputs + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + button_offset_x, pos.y);

        const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
        if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags)) {
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker)) {
                // Store current color and open a picker
                g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
                OpenPopup("picker");
                SetNextWindowPos(g.LastItemData.Rect.GetBL() + ImVec2(0.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);

        if (BeginPopup("picker")) {
            if (g.CurrentWindow->BeginCount == 1) {
                picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
                if (label != label_display_end) {
                    TextEx(label, label_display_end);
                    Spacing();
                }
                ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_
                    | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
                ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel
                    | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
                SetNextItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
                value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
            }
            EndPopup();
        }
    }

    if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel)) {
        // Position not necessarily next to last submitted button (e.g. if style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left),
        // but we need to use SameLine() to setup baseline correctly. Might want to refactor SameLine() to simplify this.
        SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) ? w_button : w_full + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_display_end);
    }

    // Convert back
    if (value_changed && picker_active_window == NULL) {
        if (!value_changed_as_float)
            for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
                f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)) {
            g.ColorEditSavedHue = f[0];
            g.ColorEditSavedSat = f[1];
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
            g.ColorEditSavedID = g.ColorEditCurrentID;
            g.ColorEditSavedColor = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(f[0], f[1], f[2], 0));
        }
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);

        col[0] = f[0];
        col[1] = f[1];
        col[2] = f[2];
        if (alpha)
            col[3] = f[3];
    }

    if (set_current_color_edit_id)
        g.ColorEditCurrentID = 0;
    PopID();
    EndGroup();

    // Drag and Drop Target
    // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
    if ((g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget()) {
        bool accepted_drag_drop = false;
        if (const ImGuiPayload *payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F)) {
            memcpy((float *)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); // Preserve alpha if any //-V512 //-V1086
            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
        }
        if (const ImGuiPayload *payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F)) {
            memcpy((float *)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
        }

        // Drag-drop payloads are always RGB
        if (accepted_drag_drop && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        EndDragDropTarget();
    }

    // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
    if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
        g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveId;

    if (value_changed && g.LastItemData.ID != 0) // In case of ID collision, the second EndGroup() won't catch g.ActiveId
        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char *label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    float col4[4] = {col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f};
    if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
        return false;
    col[0] = col4[0];
    col[1] = col4[1];
    col[2] = col4[2];
    return true;
}

// Helper for ColorPicker4()
static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList *draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w, float alpha)
{
    ImU32 alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha);
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list,
                                 ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1, pos.y),
                                 ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1),
                                 ImGuiDir_Right,
                                 IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list,
                                 ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y),
                                 ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1),
                                 ImGuiDir_Left,
                                 IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, alpha8));
}

// Note: ColorPicker4() only accesses 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// (In C++ the 'float col[4]' notation for a function argument is equivalent to 'float* col', we only specify a size to facilitate understanding of the code.)
// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar
// appears, affecting automatic width..)
// FIXME: this is trying to be aware of style.Alpha but not fully correct. Also, the color wheel will have overlapping glitches with (style.Alpha < 1.0)
bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char *label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float *ref_col)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImDrawList *draw_list = window->DrawList;
    ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    ImGuiIO &io = g.IO;

    const float width = CalcItemWidth();
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    PushID(label);
    const bool set_current_color_edit_id = (g.ColorEditCurrentID == 0);
    if (set_current_color_edit_id)
        g.ColorEditCurrentID = window->IDStack.back();
    BeginGroup();

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;

    // Context menu: display and store options.
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorPickerOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_))
        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_)
            & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_))
        flags |=
            ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_) & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);

    // Setup
    int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
    bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
    ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
    float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, width - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
    float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bars_triangles_half_sz = IM_FLOOR(bars_width * 0.20f);

    float backup_initial_col[4];
    memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));

    float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
    float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
    float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
    ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width) * 0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size * 0.5f);

    // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
    float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
    ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
    ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
    ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.

    float H = col[0], S = col[1], V = col[2];
    float R = col[0], G = col[1], B = col[2];
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) {
        // Hue is lost when converting from grayscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
        ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &H, &S, &V);
    } else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) {
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
    }

    bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;

    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel) {
        // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
        InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive()) {
            ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
            ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
            float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
            if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner - 1) * (wheel_r_inner - 1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer + 1) * (wheel_r_outer + 1)) {
                // Interactive with Hue wheel
                H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI * 0.5f;
                if (H < 0.0f)
                    H += 1.0f;
                value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
            }
            float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle))) {
                // Interacting with SV triangle
                ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
                if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
                    current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
                float uu, vv, ww;
                ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
                V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
    } else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar) {
        // SV rectangle logic
        InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive()) {
            S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
            V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
            ColorEditRestoreH(col, &H); // Greatly reduces hue jitter and reset to 0 when hue == 255 and color is rapidly modified using SV square.
            value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);

        // Hue bar logic
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive()) {
            H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
            value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
        }
    }

    // Alpha bar logic
    if (alpha_bar) {
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive()) {
            col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
            value_changed = true;
        }
    }
    PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview)) {
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        BeginGroup();
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel)) {
        const char *label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_display_end) {
            if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextEx(label, label_display_end);
        }
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview)) {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
            Text("Current");

        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview
            | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip;
        ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
        if (ref_col != NULL) {
            Text("Original");
            ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
            if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2))) {
                memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
        PopItemFlag();
        EndGroup();
    }

    // Convert back color to RGB
    if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv) {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) {
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            g.ColorEditSavedHue = H;
            g.ColorEditSavedSat = S;
            g.ColorEditSavedID = g.ColorEditCurrentID;
            g.ColorEditSavedColor = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0));
        } else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) {
            col[0] = H;
            col[1] = S;
            col[2] = V;
        }
    }

    // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
    bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0) {
        PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR
            | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview
            | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
            if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB)) {
                // FIXME: Hackily differentiating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget.
                // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050)
                value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap);
                value_changed = true;
            }
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex);
        PopItemWidth();
    }

    // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any
    if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)) {
        float new_H, new_S, new_V;
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
        if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0) {
            if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            else if (new_S <= 0)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        }
    }

    if (value_changed) {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) {
            R = col[0];
            G = col[1];
            B = col[2];
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
            ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &H, &S, &V); // Fix local Hue as display below will use it immediately.
        } else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) {
            H = col[0];
            S = col[1];
            V = col[2];
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
        }
    }

    const int style_alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(style.Alpha);
    const ImU32 col_black = IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_white = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_midgrey = IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_hues[6 + 1] = {IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, style_alpha8),
                                   IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, style_alpha8),
                                   IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, style_alpha8),
                                   IM_COL32(0, 255, 255, style_alpha8),
                                   IM_COL32(0, 0, 255, style_alpha8),
                                   IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, style_alpha8),
                                   IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, style_alpha8)};

    ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, style.Alpha);
    ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
    ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
    ImU32 user_col32_striped_of_alpha =
        ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(R, G, B, style.Alpha)); // Important: this is still including the main rendering/style alpha!!

    ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel) {
        // Render Hue Wheel
        const float aeps = 0.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
        const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
        for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++) {
            const float a0 = (n) / 6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
            const float a1 = (n + 1.0f) / 6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
            const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
            draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
            draw_list->PathStroke(col_white, 0, wheel_thickness);
            const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;

            // Paint colors over existing vertices
            ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
            ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
            ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, col_hues[n], col_hues[n + 1]);
        }

        // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
        float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f,
                              wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f);
        float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
        int hue_cursor_segments = draw_list->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(hue_cursor_rad); // Lock segment count so the +1 one matches others.
        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad + 1, col_midgrey, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, col_white, hue_cursor_segments);

        // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
        ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
        draw_list->PrimReserve(3, 3);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, col_black);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, col_white);
        draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, col_midgrey, 1.5f);
        sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
    } else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar) {
        // Render SV Square
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), col_white, hue_color32, hue_color32, col_white);
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0, 0, col_black, col_black);
        RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S) * sv_picker_size),
                                  picker_pos.x + 2,
                                  picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
        sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);

        // Render Hue Bar
        for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
            draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)),
                                               ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)),
                                               col_hues[i],
                                               col_hues[i],
                                               col_hues[i + 1],
                                               col_hues[i + 1]);
        float bar0_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size);
        RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list,
                                   ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y),
                                   ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz),
                                   bars_width + 2.0f,
                                   style.Alpha);
    }

    // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
    float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
    int sv_cursor_segments = draw_list->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(sv_cursor_rad); // Lock segment count so the +1 one matches others.
    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, sv_cursor_segments);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad + 1, col_midgrey, sv_cursor_segments);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col_white, sv_cursor_segments);

    // Render alpha bar
    if (alpha_bar) {
        float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
        ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(draw_list, bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0, bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min,
                                           bar1_bb.Max,
                                           user_col32_striped_of_alpha,
                                           user_col32_striped_of_alpha,
                                           user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK,
                                           user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
        float bar1_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size);
        RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list,
                                   ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y),
                                   ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz),
                                   bars_width + 2.0f,
                                   style.Alpha);
    }

    EndGroup();

    if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
        value_changed = false;
    if (value_changed && g.LastItemData.ID != 0) // In case of ID collision, the second EndGroup() won't catch g.ActiveId
        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);

    if (set_current_color_edit_id)
        g.ColorEditCurrentID = 0;
    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

// A little color square. Return true when clicked.
// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
// Note that 'col' may be encoded in HSV if ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV is set.
bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char *desc_id, const ImVec4 &col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const ImVec2 &size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
    const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 size(size_arg.x == 0.0f ? default_size : size_arg.x, size_arg.y == 0.0f ? default_size : size_arg.y);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
        flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);

    ImVec4 col_rgb = col;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z);

    ImVec4 col_rgb_without_alpha(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, 1.0f);
    float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
    float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
    ImRect bb_inner = bb;
    float off = 0.0f;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder) == 0) {
        off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good
                      // middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
        bb_inner.Expand(off);
    }
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col_rgb.w < 1.0f) {
        float mid_x = IM_ROUND((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(window->DrawList,
                                             ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y),
                                             bb_inner.Max,
                                             GetColorU32(col_rgb),
                                             grid_step,
                                             ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off),
                                             rounding,
                                             ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min,
                                        ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y),
                                        GetColorU32(col_rgb_without_alpha),
                                        rounding,
                                        ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft);
    } else {
        // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
        ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col_rgb : col_rgb_without_alpha;
        if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
            RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(window->DrawList, bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
        else
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding);
    }
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder) == 0) {
        if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
            RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
        else
            window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border
    }

    // Drag and Drop Source
    // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource()) {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
        else
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
        ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
        SameLine();
        TextEx("Color");
        EndDragDropSource();
    }

    // Tooltip
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip))
        ColorTooltip(
            desc_id,
            &col.x,
            flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));

    return pressed;
}

// Initialize/override default color options
void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected
    g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
}

// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char *text, const float *col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;

    if (!BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePrevious, ImGuiWindowFlags_None))
        return;
    const char *text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
    if (text_end > text) {
        TextEx(text, text_end);
        Separator();
    }

    ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    ImVec4 cf(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
    int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]),
        ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
    ColorButton(
        "##preview",
        cf,
        (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf))
            | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip,
        sz);
    SameLine();
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) || !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)) {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        else
            Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    } else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        else
            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f, A: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    }
    EndTooltip();
}

void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float *col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_);
    bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_);
    if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    g.LockMarkEdited++;
    ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
    if (allow_opt_inputs) {
        if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) != 0))
            opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB;
        if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) != 0))
            opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV;
        if (RadioButton("Hex", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0))
            opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
    }
    if (allow_opt_datatype) {
        if (allow_opt_inputs)
            Separator();
        if (RadioButton("0..255", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0))
            opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
        if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0))
            opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
    }

    if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
        Separator();
    if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1, 0)))
        OpenPopup("Copy");
    if (BeginPopup("Copy")) {
        int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]),
            ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
        char buf[64];
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)) {
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
            if (Selectable(buf))
                SetClipboardText(buf);
        }
        EndPopup();
    }

    g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
    EndPopup();
    g.LockMarkEdited--;
}

void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float *ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_);
    bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    g.LockMarkEdited++;
    if (allow_opt_picker) {
        ImVec2 picker_size(
            g.FontSize * 8,
            ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
        PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
        for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++) {
            // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
            if (picker_type > 0)
                Separator();
            PushID(picker_type);
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel
                | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
            if (picker_type == 0)
                picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
            if (picker_type == 1)
                picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
            ImVec2 backup_pos = GetCursorScreenPos();
            if (Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
                g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_);
            SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
            ImVec4 previewing_ref_col;
            memcpy(&previewing_ref_col, ref_col, sizeof(float) * ((picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4));
            ColorPicker4("##previewing_picker", &previewing_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
            PopID();
        }
        PopItemWidth();
    }
    if (allow_opt_alpha_bar) {
        if (allow_opt_picker)
            Separator();
        CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", &g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    }
    EndPopup();
    g.LockMarkEdited--;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TreeNode()
// - TreeNodeV()
// - TreeNodeEx()
// - TreeNodeExV()
// - TreeNodeBehavior() [Internal]
// - TreePush()
// - TreePop()
// - GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
// - SetNextItemOpen()
// - CollapsingHeader()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char *str_id, const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void *ptr_id, const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char *label)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char *str_id, const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void *ptr_id, const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char *label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char *str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void *ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char *str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const char *label, *label_end;
    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&label, &label_end, fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, label, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void *ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const char *label, *label_end;
    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&label, &label_end, fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, label, label_end);
}

void ImGui::TreeNodeSetOpen(ImGuiID id, bool open)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStorage *storage = g.CurrentWindow->DC.StateStorage;
    storage->SetInt(id, open ? 1 : 0);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
        return true;

    // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use the SetNextItemOpen function)
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiStorage *storage = window->DC.StateStorage;

    bool is_open;
    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen) {
        if (g.NextItemData.OpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always) {
            is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
            TreeNodeSetOpen(id, is_open);
        } else {
            // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
            const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
            if (stored_value == -1) {
                is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
                TreeNodeSetOpen(id, is_open);
            } else {
                is_open = stored_value != 0;
            }
        }
    } else {
        is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
    }

    // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
    // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
    if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef) < g.LogDepthToExpand)
        is_open = true;

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *label, const char *label_end)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
    const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding))
        ? style.FramePadding
        : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, style.FramePadding.y));

    if (!label_end)
        label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);

    // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
    const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), label_size.y + padding.y * 2);
    ImRect frame_bb;
    frame_bb.Min.x = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x;
    frame_bb.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    frame_bb.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
    frame_bb.Max.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height;
    if (display_frame) {
        // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding, to the edge of InnerClipRect
        // (FIXME: May remove this at some point and make InnerClipRect align with WindowPadding.x instead of WindowPadding.x*0.5f)
        frame_bb.Min.x -= IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f);
        frame_bb.Max.x += IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
    }

    const float text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x * 3 : padding.x * 2); // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
    const float text_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
    const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x * 2 : 0.0f); // Include collapser
    ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + text_offset_x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + text_offset_y);
    ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), padding.y);

    // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
    ImRect interact_bb = frame_bb;
    if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth)) == 0)
        interact_bb.Max.x = frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f;

    // Compute open and multi-select states before ItemAdd() as it clear NextItem data.
    bool is_open = TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(id, flags);
    bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
    g.LastItemData.DisplayRect = frame_bb;

    // If a NavLeft request is happening and ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere enabled:
    // Store data for the current depth to allow returning to this node from any child item.
    // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
    // It will become tempting to enable ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere by default or move it to ImGuiStyle.
    // Currently only supports 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero, easy to increase.
    if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()) {
            g.NavTreeNodeStack.resize(g.NavTreeNodeStack.Size + 1);
            ImGuiNavTreeNodeData *nav_tree_node_data = &g.NavTreeNodeStack.back();
            nav_tree_node_data->ID = id;
            nav_tree_node_data->InFlags = g.LastItemData.InFlags;
            nav_tree_node_data->NavRect = g.LastItemData.NavRect;
            window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);
        }

    const bool is_leaf = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) != 0;
    if (!item_add) {
        if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
            TreePushOverrideID(id);
        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID,
                                    label,
                                    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
        return is_open;
    }

    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None;
    if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap) || (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap))
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap;
    if (!is_leaf)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;

    // We allow clicking on the arrow section with keyboard modifiers held, in order to easily
    // allow browsing a tree while preserving selection with code implementing multi-selection patterns.
    // When clicking on the rest of the tree node we always disallow keyboard modifiers.
    const float arrow_hit_x1 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) - style.TouchExtraPadding.x;
    const float arrow_hit_x2 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) + (g.FontSize + padding.x * 2.0f) + style.TouchExtraPadding.x;
    const bool is_mouse_x_over_arrow = (g.IO.MousePos.x >= arrow_hit_x1 && g.IO.MousePos.x < arrow_hit_x2);
    if (window != g.HoveredWindow || !is_mouse_x_over_arrow)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers;

    // Open behaviors can be altered with the _OpenOnArrow and _OnOnDoubleClick flags.
    // Some alteration have subtle effects (e.g. toggle on MouseUp vs MouseDown events) due to requirements for multi-selection and drag and drop support.
    // - Single-click on label = Toggle on MouseUp (default, when _OpenOnArrow=0)
    // - Single-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDown (when _OpenOnArrow=0)
    // - Single-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDown (when _OpenOnArrow=1)
    // - Double-click on label = Toggle on MouseDoubleClick (when _OpenOnDoubleClick=1)
    // - Double-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDoubleClick (when _OpenOnDoubleClick=1 and _OpenOnArrow=0)
    // It is rather standard that arrow click react on Down rather than Up.
    // We set ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease on OpenOnDoubleClick because we want the item to be active on the initial MouseDown in order for drag and
    // drop to work.
    if (is_mouse_x_over_arrow)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
    else if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
    else
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease;

    bool selected = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected) != 0;
    const bool was_selected = selected;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    bool toggled = false;
    if (!is_leaf) {
        if (pressed && g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId != id) {
            if ((flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) == 0 || (g.NavActivateId == id))
                toggled = true;
            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
                toggled |= is_mouse_x_over_arrow
                    && !g.NavDisableMouseHover; // Lightweight equivalent of IsMouseHoveringRect() since ButtonBehavior() already did the job
            if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2)
                toggled = true;
        } else if (pressed && g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId == id) {
            IM_ASSERT(button_flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold);
            if (!is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
                toggled = true;
        }

        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open) {
            toggled = true;
            NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X);
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X);
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }

        if (toggled) {
            is_open = !is_open;
            window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
            g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen;
        }
    }

    // In this branch, TreeNodeBehavior() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;

    // Render
    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags nav_highlight_flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin;
    if (display_frame) {
        // Framed type
        const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.60f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
        else if (!is_leaf)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList,
                        ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y),
                        text_col,
                        is_open ? ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_UpsideDownArrow) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down) : ImGuiDir_Right,
                        1.0f);
        else // Leaf without bullet, left-adjusted text
            text_pos.x -= text_offset_x - padding.x;
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton)
            frame_bb.Max.x -= g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x;

        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogSetNextTextDecoration("###", "###");
        RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
    } else {
        // Unframed typed for tree nodes
        if (hovered || selected) {
            const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
            RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, false);
        }
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.5f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
        else if (!is_leaf)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList,
                        ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.15f),
                        text_col,
                        is_open ? ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_UpsideDownArrow) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down) : ImGuiDir_Right,
                        0.70f);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogSetNextTextDecoration(">", NULL);
        RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
    }

    if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        TreePushOverrideID(id);
    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id,
                                label,
                                g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
    return is_open;
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const char *str_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(str_id);
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const void *ptr_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(ptr_id);
}

void ImGui::TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushOverrideID(id);
}

void ImGui::TreePop()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    Unindent();

    window->DC.TreeDepth--;
    ImU32 tree_depth_mask = (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);

    // Handle Left arrow to move to parent tree node (when ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere is enabled)
    if (window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask & tree_depth_mask) // Only set during request
    {
        ImGuiNavTreeNodeData *nav_tree_node_data = &g.NavTreeNodeStack.back();
        IM_ASSERT(nav_tree_node_data->ID == window->IDStack.back());
        if (g.NavIdIsAlive && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
            NavMoveRequestResolveWithPastTreeNode(&g.NavMoveResultLocal, nav_tree_node_data);
        g.NavTreeNodeStack.pop_back();
    }
    window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask &= tree_depth_mask - 1;

    IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size
              > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
    PopID();
}

// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

// Set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
void ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
        return;
    g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen;
    g.NextItemData.OpenVal = is_open;
    g.NextItemData.OpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior
// closer to normal TreeNode().
bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char *label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
}

// p_visible == NULL                        : regular collapsing header
// p_visible != NULL && *p_visible == true  : show a small close button on the corner of the header, clicking the button will set *p_visible = false
// p_visible != NULL && *p_visible == false : do not show the header at all
// Do not mistake this with the Open state of the header itself, which you can adjust with SetNextItemOpen() or ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen.
bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char *label, bool *p_visible, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (p_visible && !*p_visible)
        return false;

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader;
    if (p_visible)
        flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton;
    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags, label);
    if (p_visible != NULL) {
        // Create a small overlapping close button
        // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
        // FIXME: CloseButton can overlap into text, need find a way to clip the text somehow.
        ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiLastItemData last_item_backup = g.LastItemData;
        float button_size = g.FontSize;
        float button_x = ImMax(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max.x - g.Style.FramePadding.x - button_size);
        float button_y = g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y;
        ImGuiID close_button_id = GetIDWithSeed("#CLOSE", NULL, id);
        if (CloseButton(close_button_id, ImVec2(button_x, button_y)))
            *p_visible = false;
        g.LastItemData = last_item_backup;
    }

    return is_open;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Selectable()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Tip: pass a non-visible label (e.g. "##hello") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
// With this scheme, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns and ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap are also frequently used flags.
// FIXME: Selectable() with (size.x == 0.0f) and (SelectableTextAlign.x > 0.0f) followed by SameLine() is currently not supported.
bool ImGui::Selectable(const char *label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2 &size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;

    // Submit label or explicit size to ItemSize(), whereas ItemAdd() will submit a larger/spanning rectangle.
    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
    ItemSize(size, 0.0f);

    // Fill horizontal space
    // We don't support (size < 0.0f) in Selectable() because the ItemSpacing extension would make explicitly right-aligned sizes not visibly match other
    // widgets.
    const bool span_all_columns = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) != 0;
    const float min_x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x : pos.x;
    const float max_x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x : window->WorkRect.Max.x;
    if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth))
        size.x = ImMax(label_size.x, max_x - min_x);

    // Text stays at the submission position, but bounding box may be extended on both sides
    const ImVec2 text_min = pos;
    const ImVec2 text_max(min_x + size.x, pos.y + size.y);

    // Selectables are meant to be tightly packed together with no click-gap, so we extend their box to cover spacing between selectable.
    ImRect bb(min_x, pos.y, text_max.x, text_max.y);
    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoPadWithHalfSpacing) == 0) {
        const float spacing_x = span_all_columns ? 0.0f : style.ItemSpacing.x;
        const float spacing_y = style.ItemSpacing.y;
        const float spacing_L = IM_FLOOR(spacing_x * 0.50f);
        const float spacing_U = IM_FLOOR(spacing_y * 0.50f);
        bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
        bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
        bb.Max.x += (spacing_x - spacing_L);
        bb.Max.y += (spacing_y - spacing_U);
    }
    // if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) { GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); }

    // Modify ClipRect for the ItemAdd(), faster than doing a PushColumnsBackground/PushTableBackground for every Selectable..
    const float backup_clip_rect_min_x = window->ClipRect.Min.x;
    const float backup_clip_rect_max_x = window->ClipRect.Max.x;
    if (span_all_columns) {
        window->ClipRect.Min.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x;
        window->ClipRect.Max.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x;
    }

    const bool disabled_item = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) != 0;
    const bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id, NULL, disabled_item ? ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled : ImGuiItemFlags_None);
    if (span_all_columns) {
        window->ClipRect.Min.x = backup_clip_rect_min_x;
        window->ClipRect.Max.x = backup_clip_rect_max_x;
    }

    if (!item_add)
        return false;

    const bool disabled_global = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0;
    if (disabled_item && !disabled_global) // Only testing this as an optimization
        BeginDisabled();

    // FIXME: We can standardize the behavior of those two, we could also keep the fast path of override ClipRect + full push on render only,
    // which would be advantageous since most selectable are not selected.
    if (span_all_columns && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
        PushColumnsBackground();
    else if (span_all_columns && g.CurrentTable)
        TablePushBackgroundChannel();

    // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) {
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId;
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner) {
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoSetKeyOwner;
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick) {
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease) {
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease;
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) {
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
    }
    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap) || (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap)) {
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap;
    }

    const bool was_selected = selected;
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);

    // Auto-select when moved into
    // - This will be more fully fleshed in the range-select branch
    // - This is not exposed as it won't nicely work with some user side handling of shift/control
    // - We cannot do 'if (g.NavJustMovedToId != id) { selected = false; pressed = was_selected; }' for two reasons
    //   - (1) it would require focus scope to be set, need exposing PushFocusScope() or equivalent (e.g. BeginSelection() calling PushFocusScope())
    //   - (2) usage will fail with clipped items
    //   The multi-select API aim to fix those issues, e.g. may be replaced with a BeginSelection() API.
    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav) && g.NavJustMovedToId != 0 && g.NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId == g.CurrentFocusScopeId)
        if (g.NavJustMovedToId == id)
            selected = pressed = true;

    // Update NavId when clicking or when Hovering (this doesn't happen on most widgets), so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard
    if (pressed || (hovered && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover))) {
        if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent) {
            SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent, g.CurrentFocusScopeId, WindowRectAbsToRel(window, bb)); // (bb == NavRect)
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
        }
    }
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // In this branch, Selectable() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;

    // Render
    if (hovered || selected) {
        const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
    }
    if (g.NavId == id)
        RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);

    if (span_all_columns && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
        PopColumnsBackground();
    else if (span_all_columns && g.CurrentTable)
        TablePopBackgroundChannel();

    RenderTextClipped(text_min, text_max, label, NULL, &label_size, style.SelectableTextAlign, &bb);

    // Automatically close popups
    if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups)
        && !(g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
        CloseCurrentPopup();

    if (disabled_item && !disabled_global)
        EndDisabled();

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
    return pressed; //-V1020
}

bool ImGui::Selectable(const char *label, bool *p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2 &size_arg)
{
    if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg)) {
        *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginListBox()
// - EndListBox()
// - ListBox()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, use size.x = -FLT_MIN and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty"
// Tip: If your vertical size is calculated from an item count (e.g. 10 * item_height) consider adding a fractional part to facilitate seeing scrolling
// boundaries (e.g. 10.25 * item_height).
bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size_arg)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // Size default to hold ~7.25 items.
    // Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
    ImVec2 size = ImFloor(CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.25f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
    ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    if (!IsRectVisible(bb.Min, bb.Max)) {
        ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
        ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb);
        return false;
    }

    // FIXME-OPT: We could omit the BeginGroup() if label_size.x but would need to omit the EndGroup() as well.
    BeginGroup();
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f) {
        ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y);
        RenderText(label_pos, label);
        window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, label_pos + label_size);
    }

    BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndListBox()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && "Mismatched BeginListBox/EndListBox calls. Did you test the return value of BeginListBox?");
    IM_UNUSED(window);

    EndChildFrame();
    EndGroup(); // This is only required to be able to do IsItemXXX query on the whole ListBox including label
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(const char *label, int *current_item, const char *const items[], int items_count, int height_items)
{
    const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void *)items, items_count, height_items);
    return value_changed;
}

// This is merely a helper around BeginListBox(), EndListBox().
// Considering using those directly to submit custom data or store selection differently.
bool ImGui::ListBox(const char *label, int *current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void *, int, const char **), void *data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;

    // Calculate size from "height_in_items"
    if (height_in_items < 0)
        height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
    float height_in_items_f = height_in_items + 0.25f;
    ImVec2 size(0.0f, ImFloor(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));

    if (!BeginListBox(label, size))
        return false;

    // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different height,
    // you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
    bool value_changed = false;
    ImGuiListClipper clipper;
    clipper.Begin(
        items_count,
        GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
    while (clipper.Step())
        for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++) {
            const char *item_text;
            if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
                item_text = "*Unknown item*";

            PushID(i);
            const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
            if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected)) {
                *current_item = i;
                value_changed = true;
            }
            if (item_selected)
                SetItemDefaultFocus();
            PopID();
        }
    EndListBox();

    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);

    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - PlotEx() [Internal]
// - PlotLines()
// - PlotHistogram()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Plot/Graph widgets are not very good.
// Consider writing your own, or using a third-party one, see:
// - ImPlot https://github.com/epezent/implot
// - others https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Useful-Extensions
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

int ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type,
                  const char *label,
                  float (*values_getter)(void *data, int idx),
                  void *data,
                  int values_count,
                  int values_offset,
                  const char *overlay_text,
                  float scale_min,
                  float scale_max,
                  const ImVec2 &size_arg)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return -1;

    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImVec2 frame_size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);

    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
        return -1;
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags);

    // Determine scale from values if not specified
    if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX) {
        float v_min = FLT_MAX;
        float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
        for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++) {
            const float v = values_getter(data, i);
            if (v != v) // Ignore NaN values
                continue;
            v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
            v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
        }
        if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
            scale_min = v_min;
        if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
            scale_max = v_max;
    }

    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);

    const int values_count_min = (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? 2 : 1;
    int idx_hovered = -1;
    if (values_count >= values_count_min) {
        int res_w = ImMin((int)frame_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
        int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);

        // Tooltip on hover
        if (hovered && inner_bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos)) {
            const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
            const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
            IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);

            const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx + 1, v1);
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
            idx_hovered = v_idx;
        }

        const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
        const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));

        float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
        float t0 = 0.0f;
        ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2(t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale)); // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
        float histogram_zero_line_t =
            (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (1 + scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f); // Where does the zero line stands

        const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
        const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);

        for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++) {
            const float t1 = t0 + t_step;
            const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
            IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
            const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2(t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale));

            // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
            ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
            ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) {
                window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, idx_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            } else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram) {
                if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
                    pos1.x -= 1.0f;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, idx_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }

            t0 = t1;
            tp0 = tp1;
        }
    }

    // Text overlay
    if (overlay_text)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.0f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);

    // Return hovered index or -1 if none are hovered.
    // This is currently not exposed in the public API because we need a larger redesign of the whole thing, but in the short-term we are making it available in
    // PlotEx().
    return idx_hovered;
}

struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData {
    const float *Values;
    int Stride;

    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float *values, int stride)
    {
        Values = values;
        Stride = stride;
    }
};

static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void *data, int idx)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData *plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData *)data;
    const float v = *(const float *)(const void *)((const unsigned char *)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
    return v;
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(const char *label,
                      const float *values,
                      int values_count,
                      int values_offset,
                      const char *overlay_text,
                      float scale_min,
                      float scale_max,
                      ImVec2 graph_size,
                      int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void *)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(const char *label,
                      float (*values_getter)(void *data, int idx),
                      void *data,
                      int values_count,
                      int values_offset,
                      const char *overlay_text,
                      float scale_min,
                      float scale_max,
                      ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char *label,
                          const float *values,
                          int values_count,
                          int values_offset,
                          const char *overlay_text,
                          float scale_min,
                          float scale_max,
                          ImVec2 graph_size,
                          int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void *)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char *label,
                          float (*values_getter)(void *data, int idx),
                          void *data,
                          int values_count,
                          int values_offset,
                          const char *overlay_text,
                          float scale_min,
                          float scale_max,
                          ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
// Those is not very useful, legacy API.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Value()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::Value(const char *prefix, bool b)
{
    Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
}

void ImGui::Value(const char *prefix, int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(const char *prefix, unsigned int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(const char *prefix, float v, const char *float_format)
{
    if (float_format) {
        char fmt[64];
        ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
        Text(fmt, prefix, v);
    } else {
        Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
    }
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ImGuiMenuColumns [Internal]
// - BeginMenuBar()
// - EndMenuBar()
// - BeginMainMenuBar()
// - EndMainMenuBar()
// - BeginMenu()
// - EndMenu()
// - MenuItemEx() [Internal]
// - MenuItem()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Helpers for internal use
void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(float spacing, bool window_reappearing)
{
    if (window_reappearing)
        memset(Widths, 0, sizeof(Widths));
    Spacing = (ImU16)spacing;
    CalcNextTotalWidth(true);
    memset(Widths, 0, sizeof(Widths));
    TotalWidth = NextTotalWidth;
    NextTotalWidth = 0;
}

void ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcNextTotalWidth(bool update_offsets)
{
    ImU16 offset = 0;
    bool want_spacing = false;
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Widths); i++) {
        ImU16 width = Widths[i];
        if (want_spacing && width > 0)
            offset += Spacing;
        want_spacing |= (width > 0);
        if (update_offsets) {
            if (i == 1) {
                OffsetLabel = offset;
            }
            if (i == 2) {
                OffsetShortcut = offset;
            }
            if (i == 3) {
                OffsetMark = offset;
            }
        }
        offset += width;
    }
    NextTotalWidth = offset;
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w_icon, float w_label, float w_shortcut, float w_mark)
{
    Widths[0] = ImMax(Widths[0], (ImU16)w_icon);
    Widths[1] = ImMax(Widths[1], (ImU16)w_label);
    Widths[2] = ImMax(Widths[2], (ImU16)w_shortcut);
    Widths[3] = ImMax(Widths[3], (ImU16)w_mark);
    CalcNextTotalWidth(false);
    return (float)ImMax(TotalWidth, NextTotalWidth);
}

// FIXME: Provided a rectangle perhaps e.g. a BeginMenuBarEx() could be used anywhere..
// Currently the main responsibility of this function being to setup clip-rect + horizontal layout + menu navigation layer.
// Ideally we also want this to be responsible for claiming space out of the main window scrolling rectangle, in which case ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar will become
// unnecessary. Then later the same system could be used for multiple menu-bars, scrollbars, side-bars.
bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0 // FIXME: Misleading to use a group for that backup/restore
    PushID("##menubar");

    // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
    // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks
    // particularly glitchy.
    ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
    ImRect clip_rect(IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize),
                     IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize),
                     IM_ROUND(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - ImMax(window->WindowRounding, window->WindowBorderSize))),
                     IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Max.y));
    clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
    PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);

    // We overwrite CursorMaxPos because BeginGroup sets it to CursorPos (essentially the .EmitItem hack in EndMenuBar() would need something analogous here,
    // maybe a BeginGroupEx() with flags).
    window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
    AlignTextToFramePadding();
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;

    // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
    if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right)
        && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) {
        // Try to find out if the request is for one of our child menu
        ImGuiWindow *nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
        while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
        if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal
            && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded) == 0) {
            // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
            // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window
            // (probably not worth bothering)
            const ImGuiNavLayer layer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
            IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext & (1 << layer)); // Sanity check (FIXME: Seems unnecessary)
            FocusWindow(window);
            SetNavID(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, 0, window->NavRectRel[layer]);
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
            g.NavDisableMouseHover = g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
            NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, g.NavMoveClipDir, g.NavMoveFlags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags); // Repeat
        }
    }

    IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6011); // Static Analysis false positive "warning C6011: Dereferencing NULL pointer 'window'"
    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    PopClipRect();
    PopID();
    window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x =
        window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
    g.GroupStack.back().EmitItem = false;
    EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
}

// Important: calling order matters!
// FIXME: Somehow overlapping with docking tech.
// FIXME: The "rect-cut" aspect of this could be formalized into a lower-level helper (rect-cut: https://halt.software/dead-simple-layouts)
bool ImGui::BeginViewportSideBar(const char *name, ImGuiViewport *viewport_p, ImGuiDir dir, float axis_size, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags)
{
    IM_ASSERT(dir != ImGuiDir_None);

    ImGuiWindow *bar_window = FindWindowByName(name);
    if (bar_window == NULL || bar_window->BeginCount == 0) {
        // Calculate and set window size/position
        ImGuiViewportP *viewport = (ImGuiViewportP *)(void *)(viewport_p ? viewport_p : GetMainViewport());
        ImRect avail_rect = viewport->GetBuildWorkRect();
        ImGuiAxis axis = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
        ImVec2 pos = avail_rect.Min;
        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right || dir == ImGuiDir_Down)
            pos[axis] = avail_rect.Max[axis] - axis_size;
        ImVec2 size = avail_rect.GetSize();
        size[axis] = axis_size;
        SetNextWindowPos(pos);
        SetNextWindowSize(size);

        // Report our size into work area (for next frame) using actual window size
        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Left)
            viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin[axis] += axis_size;
        else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down || dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
            viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax[axis] -= axis_size;
    }

    window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Lift normal size constraint
    bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
    PopStyleVar(2);

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiViewportP *viewport = (ImGuiViewportP *)(void *)GetMainViewport();

    // For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
    // FIXME: This could be generalized as an opt-in way to clamp window->DC.CursorStartPos to avoid SafeArea?
    // FIXME: Consider removing support for safe area down the line... it's messy. Nowadays consoles have support for TV calibration in OS settings.
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
    float height = GetFrameHeight();
    bool is_open = BeginViewportSideBar("##MainMenuBar", viewport, ImGuiDir_Up, height, window_flags);
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);

    if (is_open)
        BeginMenuBar();
    else
        End();
    return is_open;
}

void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
{
    EndMenuBar();

    // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
    // FIXME: With this strategy we won't be able to restore a NULL focus.
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main && !g.NavAnyRequest)
        FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(g.NavWindow, NULL, NULL, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal | ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild);

    End();
}

static bool IsRootOfOpenMenuSet()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if ((g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.BeginPopupStack.Size) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
        return false;

    // Initially we used 'upper_popup->OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back()' to differentiate multiple menu sets from each others
    // (e.g. inside menu bar vs loose menu items) based on parent ID.
    // This would however prevent the use of e.g. PushID() user code submitting menus.
    // Previously this worked between popup and a first child menu because the first child menu always had the _ChildWindow flag,
    // making hovering on parent popup possible while first child menu was focused - but this was generally a bug with other side effects.
    // Instead we don't treat Popup specifically (in order to consistently support menu features in them), maybe the first child menu of a Popup
    // doesn't have the _ChildWindow flag, and we rely on this IsRootOfOpenMenuSet() check to allow hovering between root window/popup and first child menu.
    // In the end, lack of ID check made it so we could no longer differentiate between separate menu sets. To compensate for that, we at least check parent
    // window nav layer. This fixes the most common case of menu opening on hover when moving between window content and menu bar. Multiple different menu sets
    // in same nav layer would still open on hover, but that should be a lesser problem, because if such menus are close in proximity in window content then it
    // won't feel weird and if they are far apart it likely won't be a problem anyone runs into.
    const ImGuiPopupData *upper_popup = &g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size];
    if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent != upper_popup->ParentNavLayer)
        return false;
    return upper_popup->Window && (upper_popup->Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) && ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(upper_popup->Window, window, true);
}

bool ImGui::BeginMenuEx(const char *label, const char *icon, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);

    // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent
    // menu) The first menu in a hierarchy isn't so hovering doesn't get across (otherwise e.g. resizing borders with ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren would
    // react), but top-most BeginMenu() will bypass that limitation.
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar
        | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;

    // If a menu with same the ID was already submitted, we will append to it, matching the behavior of Begin().
    // We are relying on a O(N) search - so O(N log N) over the frame - which seems like the most efficient for the expected small amount of BeginMenu() calls
    // per frame. If somehow this is ever becoming a problem we can switch to use e.g. ImGuiStorage mapping key to last frame used.
    if (g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.contains(id)) {
        if (menu_is_open)
            menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, window_flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
        else
            g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // we behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
        return menu_is_open;
    }

    // Tag menu as used. Next time BeginMenu() with same ID is called it will append to existing menu
    g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.push_back(id);

    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent without always being a Child window)
    // This is only done for items for the menu set and not the full parent window.
    const bool menuset_is_open = IsRootOfOpenMenuSet();
    if (menuset_is_open)
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck, true);

    // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu,
    // However the final position is going to be different! It is chosen by FindBestWindowPosForPopup().
    // e.g. Menus tend to overlap each other horizontally to amplify relative Z-ordering.
    ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    PushID(label);
    if (!enabled)
        BeginDisabled();
    const ImGuiMenuColumns *offsets = &window->DC.MenuColumns;
    bool pressed;

    // We use ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner to allow down on one menu item, move, up on another.
    const ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags =
        ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) {
        // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
        // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
        // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
        float w = label_size.x;
        ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
        pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, label_size.y));
        RenderText(text_pos, label);
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x +=
            IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work
                                                            // to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    } else {
        // Menu inside a regular/vertical menu
        // (In a typical menu window where all items are BeginMenu() or MenuItem() calls, extra_w will always be 0.0f.
        //  Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system.
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
        float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f;
        float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
        float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, 0.0f, checkmark_w); // Feedback to next frame
        float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w);
        ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
        pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, label_size.y));
        RenderText(text_pos, label);
        if (icon_w > 0.0f)
            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetIcon, 0.0f), icon);
        RenderArrow(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetMark + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), ImGuiDir_Right);
    }
    if (!enabled)
        EndDisabled();

    const bool hovered = (g.HoveredId == id) && enabled && !g.NavDisableMouseHover;
    if (menuset_is_open)
        PopItemFlag();

    bool want_open = false;
    bool want_close = false;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
        // Close menu when not hovering it anymore unless we are moving roughly in the direction of the menu
        // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
        bool moving_toward_child_menu = false;
        ImGuiPopupData *child_popup =
            (g.BeginPopupStack.Size < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) ? &g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size] : NULL; // Popup candidate (testing below)
        ImGuiWindow *child_menu_window = (child_popup && child_popup->Window && child_popup->Window->ParentWindow == window) ? child_popup->Window : NULL;
        if (g.HoveredWindow == window && child_menu_window != NULL) {
            float ref_unit = g.FontSize; // FIXME-DPI
            float child_dir = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? 1.0f : -1.0f;
            ImRect next_window_rect = child_menu_window->Rect();
            ImVec2 ta = (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta);
            ImVec2 tb = (child_dir > 0.0f) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
            ImVec2 tc = (child_dir > 0.0f) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
            float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, ref_unit * 0.5f, ref_unit * 2.5f); // add a bit of extra slack.
            ta.x += child_dir * -0.5f;
            tb.x += child_dir * ref_unit;
            tc.x += child_dir * ref_unit;
            tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -ref_unit * 8.0f); // triangle has maximum height to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus
            tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +ref_unit * 8.0f);
            moving_toward_child_menu = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
            // GetForegroundDrawList()->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_toward_child_menu ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); // [DEBUG]
        }

        // The 'HovereWindow == window' check creates an inconsistency (e.g. moving away from menu slowly tends to hit same window, whereas moving away fast
        // does not) But we also need to not close the top-menu menu when moving over void. Perhaps we should extend the triangle check to a larger polygon.
        // (Remember to test this on BeginPopup("A")->BeginMenu("B") sequence which behaves slightly differently as B isn't a Child of A and hovering isn't
        // shared.)
        if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && !moving_toward_child_menu && !g.NavDisableMouseHover)
            want_close = true;

        // Open
        if (!menu_is_open && pressed) // Click/activate to open
            want_open = true;
        else if (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_toward_child_menu) // Hover to open
            want_open = true;
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    } else {
        // Menu bar
        if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
        {
            want_close = true;
            want_open = menu_is_open = false;
        } else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
        {
            want_open = true;
        } else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) {
                  // ..use object.. }'
        want_close = true;
    if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None))
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable | (menu_is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
    PopID();

    if (want_open && !menu_is_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size) {
        // Don't reopen/recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
        OpenPopup(label);
    } else if (want_open) {
        menu_is_open = true;
        OpenPopup(label);
    }

    if (menu_is_open) {
        ImGuiLastItemData last_item_in_parent = g.LastItemData;
        SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always); // Note: misleading: the value will serve as reference for FindBestWindowPosForPopup(), not actual pos.
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.PopupRounding); // First level will use _PopupRounding, subsequent will use _ChildRounding
        menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, window_flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
        PopStyleVar();
        if (menu_is_open) {
            // Restore LastItemData so IsItemXXXX functions can work after BeginMenu()/EndMenu()
            // (This fixes using IsItemClicked() and IsItemHovered(), but IsItemHovered() also relies on its support for ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck)
            g.LastItemData = last_item_in_parent;
            if (g.HoveredWindow == window)
                g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow;
        }
    } else {
        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
    }

    return menu_is_open;
}

bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char *label, bool enabled)
{
    return BeginMenuEx(label, NULL, enabled);
}

void ImGui::EndMenu()
{
    // Nav: When a left move request our menu failed, close ourselves.
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup); // Mismatched BeginMenu()/EndMenu() calls
    ImGuiWindow *parent_window = window->ParentWindow; // Should always be != NULL is we passed assert.
    if (window->BeginCount == window->BeginCountPreviousFrame)
        if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
            if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window) && parent_window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) {
                ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1, true);
                NavMoveRequestCancel();
            }

    EndPopup();
}

bool ImGui::MenuItemEx(const char *label, const char *icon, const char *shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow *window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // See BeginMenuEx() for comments about this.
    const bool menuset_is_open = IsRootOfOpenMenuSet();
    if (menuset_is_open)
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck, true);

    // We've been using the equivalent of ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover on all Selectable() since early Nav system days (commit 43ee5d73),
    // but I am unsure whether this should be kept at all. For now moved it to be an opt-in feature used by menus only.
    bool pressed;
    PushID(label);
    if (!enabled)
        BeginDisabled();

    // We use ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner to allow down on one menu item, move, up on another.
    const ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags =
        ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease | ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover;
    const ImGuiMenuColumns *offsets = &window->DC.MenuColumns;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) {
        // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
        // Note that in this situation: we don't render the shortcut, we render a highlight instead of the selected tick mark.
        float w = label_size.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
        pressed = Selectable("", selected, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible)
            RenderText(text_pos, label);
        window->DC.CursorPos.x +=
            IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work
                                                            // to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    } else {
        // Menu item inside a vertical menu
        // (In a typical menu window where all items are BeginMenu() or MenuItem() calls, extra_w will always be 0.0f.
        //  Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system.
        float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f;
        float shortcut_w = (shortcut && shortcut[0]) ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL).x : 0.0f;
        float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
        float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, shortcut_w, checkmark_w); // Feedback for next frame
        float stretch_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w);
        pressed = Selectable("", false, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, label_size.y));
        if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible) {
            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetLabel, 0.0f), label);
            if (icon_w > 0.0f)
                RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetIcon, 0.0f), icon);
            if (shortcut_w > 0.0f) {
                PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
                RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetShortcut + stretch_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
                PopStyleColor();
            }
            if (selected)
                RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList,
                                pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetMark + stretch_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f),
                                GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text),
                                g.FontSize * 0.866f);
        }
    }
    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID,
                                label,
                                g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (selected ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
    if (!enabled)
        EndDisabled();
    PopID();
    if (menuset_is_open)
        PopItemFlag();

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char *label, const char *shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
{
    return MenuItemEx(label, NULL, shortcut, selected, enabled);
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char *label, const char *shortcut, bool *p_selected, bool enabled)
{
    if (MenuItemEx(label, NULL, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled)) {
        if (p_selected)
            *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginTabBar()
// - BeginTabBarEx() [Internal]
// - EndTabBar()
// - TabBarLayout() [Internal]
// - TabBarCalcTabID() [Internal]
// - TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() [Internal]
// - TabBarFindTabById() [Internal]
// - TabBarFindTabByOrder() [Internal]
// - TabBarGetCurrentTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarGetTabName() [Internal]
// - TabBarRemoveTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarCloseTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollClamp() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollToTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarQueueFocus() [Internal]
// - TabBarQueueReorder() [Internal]
// - TabBarProcessReorderFromMousePos() [Internal]
// - TabBarProcessReorder() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollingButtons() [Internal]
// - TabBarTabListPopupButton() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

struct ImGuiTabBarSection {
    int TabCount; // Number of tabs in this section.
    float Width; // Sum of width of tabs in this section (after shrinking down)
    float Spacing; // Horizontal spacing at the end of the section.

    ImGuiTabBarSection()
    {
        memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
    }
};

namespace ImGui
{
static void TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar);
static ImU32 TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, const char *label, ImGuiWindow *docked_window);
static float TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
static float TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, float scrolling);
static void TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiTabBarSection *sections);
static ImGuiTabItem *TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar);
static ImGuiTabItem *TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar);
}

ImGuiTabBar::ImGuiTabBar()
{
    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
    CurrFrameVisible = PrevFrameVisible = -1;
    LastTabItemIdx = -1;
}

static inline int TabItemGetSectionIdx(const ImGuiTabItem *tab)
{
    return (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading) ? 0 : (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing) ? 2 : 1;
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerBySection(const void *lhs, const void *rhs)
{
    const ImGuiTabItem *a = (const ImGuiTabItem *)lhs;
    const ImGuiTabItem *b = (const ImGuiTabItem *)rhs;
    const int a_section = TabItemGetSectionIdx(a);
    const int b_section = TabItemGetSectionIdx(b);
    if (a_section != b_section)
        return a_section - b_section;
    return (int)(a->IndexDuringLayout - b->IndexDuringLayout);
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByBeginOrder(const void *lhs, const void *rhs)
{
    const ImGuiTabItem *a = (const ImGuiTabItem *)lhs;
    const ImGuiTabItem *b = (const ImGuiTabItem *)rhs;
    return (int)(a->BeginOrder - b->BeginOrder);
}

static ImGuiTabBar *GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(const ImGuiPtrOrIndex &ref)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    return ref.Ptr ? (ImGuiTabBar *)ref.Ptr : g.TabBars.GetByIndex(ref.Index);
}

static ImGuiPtrOrIndex GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (g.TabBars.Contains(tab_bar))
        return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(g.TabBars.GetIndex(tab_bar));
    return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(tab_bar);
}

bool ImGui::BeginTabBar(const char *str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id);
    ImRect tab_bar_bb =
        ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    tab_bar->ID = id;
    return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused);
}

bool ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, const ImRect &tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        PushOverrideID(tab_bar->ID);

    // Add to stack
    g.CurrentTabBarStack.push_back(GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(tab_bar));
    g.CurrentTabBar = tab_bar;

    // Append with multiple BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar() pairs.
    tab_bar->BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible == g.FrameCount) {
        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY);
        tab_bar->BeginCount++;
        return true;
    }

    // Ensure correct ordering when toggling ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable flag, or when a new tab was added while being not reorderable
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) != (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
        || (tab_bar->TabsAddedNew && !(flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)))
        ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByBeginOrder);
    tab_bar->TabsAddedNew = false;

    // Flags
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;

    tab_bar->Flags = flags;
    tab_bar->BarRect = tab_bar_bb;
    tab_bar->WantLayout = true; // Layout will be done on the first call to ItemTab()
    tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;
    tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
    tab_bar->PrevTabsContentsHeight = tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight;
    tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight = 0.0f;
    tab_bar->ItemSpacingY = g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
    tab_bar->FramePadding = g.Style.FramePadding;
    tab_bar->TabsActiveCount = 0;
    tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = -1;
    tab_bar->BeginCount = 1;

    // Set cursor pos in a way which only be used in the off-chance the user erroneously submits item before BeginTabItem(): items will overlap
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY);

    // Draw separator
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive);
    const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f;
    {
        const float separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
        const float separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
    }
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndTabBar()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL) {
        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Mismatched BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar()!");
        return;
    }

    // Fallback in case no TabItem have been submitted
    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);

    // Restore the last visible height if no tab is visible, this reduce vertical flicker/movement when a tabs gets removed without calling SetTabItemClosed().
    const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted || tab_bar->VisibleTabId == 0 || tab_bar_appearing) {
        tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y - tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y, tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight);
        window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight;
    } else {
        window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->PrevTabsContentsHeight;
    }
    if (tab_bar->BeginCount > 1)
        window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BackupCursorPos;

    tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = -1;
    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        PopID();

    g.CurrentTabBarStack.pop_back();
    g.CurrentTabBar = g.CurrentTabBarStack.empty() ? NULL : GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(g.CurrentTabBarStack.back());
}

// Scrolling happens only in the central section (leading/trailing sections are not scrolling)
static float TabBarCalcScrollableWidth(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiTabBarSection *sections)
{
    return tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - sections[0].Width - sections[2].Width - sections[1].Spacing;
}

// This is called only once a frame before by the first call to ItemTab()
// The reason we're not calling it in BeginTabBar() is to leave a chance to the user to call the SetTabItemClosed() functions.
static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    tab_bar->WantLayout = false;

    // Garbage collect by compacting list
    // Detect if we need to sort out tab list (e.g. in rare case where a tab changed section)
    int tab_dst_n = 0;
    bool need_sort_by_section = false;
    ImGuiTabBarSection sections[3]; // Layout sections: Leading, Central, Trailing
    for (int tab_src_n = 0; tab_src_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_src_n++) {
        ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
        if (tab->LastFrameVisible < tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible || tab->WantClose) {
            // Remove tab
            if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) {
                tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0;
            }
            if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID) {
                tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
            }
            if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab->ID) {
                tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
            }
            continue;
        }
        if (tab_dst_n != tab_src_n)
            tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n] = tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];

        tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n];
        tab->IndexDuringLayout = (ImS16)tab_dst_n;

        // We will need sorting if tabs have changed section (e.g. moved from one of Leading/Central/Trailing to another)
        int curr_tab_section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab);
        if (tab_dst_n > 0) {
            ImGuiTabItem *prev_tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n - 1];
            int prev_tab_section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(prev_tab);
            if (curr_tab_section_n == 0 && prev_tab_section_n != 0)
                need_sort_by_section = true;
            if (prev_tab_section_n == 2 && curr_tab_section_n != 2)
                need_sort_by_section = true;
        }

        sections[curr_tab_section_n].TabCount++;
        tab_dst_n++;
    }
    if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size != tab_dst_n)
        tab_bar->Tabs.resize(tab_dst_n);

    if (need_sort_by_section)
        ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerBySection);

    // Calculate spacing between sections
    sections[0].Spacing = sections[0].TabCount > 0 && (sections[1].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount) > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f;
    sections[1].Spacing = sections[1].TabCount > 0 && sections[2].TabCount > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f;

    // Setup next selected tab
    ImGuiID scroll_to_tab_id = 0;
    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId) {
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId;
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
        scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
    }

    // Process order change request (we could probably process it when requested but it's just saner to do it in a single spot).
    if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId != 0) {
        if (TabBarProcessReorder(tab_bar))
            if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
                scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId;
        tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
    }

    // Tab List Popup (will alter tab_bar->BarRect and therefore the available width!)
    const bool tab_list_popup_button = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton) != 0;
    if (tab_list_popup_button)
        if (ImGuiTabItem *tab_to_select = TabBarTabListPopupButton(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Min.x!
            scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;

    // Leading/Trailing tabs will be shrink only if central one aren't visible anymore, so layout the shrink data as: leading, trailing, central
    // (whereas our tabs are stored as: leading, central, trailing)
    int shrink_buffer_indexes[3] = {0, sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount, sections[0].TabCount};
    g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.resize(tab_bar->Tabs.Size);

    // Compute ideal tabs widths + store them into shrink buffer
    ImGuiTabItem *most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
    int curr_section_n = -1;
    bool found_selected_tab_id = false;
    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++) {
        ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
        IM_ASSERT(tab->LastFrameVisible >= tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible);

        if ((most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected)
            && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button))
            most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
        if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
            found_selected_tab_id = true;
        if (scroll_to_tab_id == 0 && g.NavJustMovedToId == tab->ID)
            scroll_to_tab_id = tab->ID;

        // Refresh tab width immediately, otherwise changes of style e.g. style.FramePadding.x would noticeably lag in the tab bar.
        // Additionally, when using TabBarAddTab() to manipulate tab bar order we occasionally insert new tabs that don't have a width yet,
        // and we cannot wait for the next BeginTabItem() call. We cannot compute this width within TabBarAddTab() because font size depends on the active
        // window.
        const char *tab_name = TabBarGetTabName(tab_bar, tab);
        const bool has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) == 0 || (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument);
        tab->ContentWidth = (tab->RequestedWidth >= 0.0f) ? tab->RequestedWidth : TabItemCalcSize(tab_name, has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker).x;

        int section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab);
        ImGuiTabBarSection *section = &sections[section_n];
        section->Width += tab->ContentWidth + (section_n == curr_section_n ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f);
        curr_section_n = section_n;

        // Store data so we can build an array sorted by width if we need to shrink tabs down
        IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6385);
        ImGuiShrinkWidthItem *shrink_width_item = &g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[shrink_buffer_indexes[section_n]++];
        shrink_width_item->Index = tab_n;
        shrink_width_item->Width = shrink_width_item->InitialWidth = tab->ContentWidth;
        tab->Width = ImMax(tab->ContentWidth, 1.0f);
    }

    // Compute total ideal width (used for e.g. auto-resizing a window)
    tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal = 0.0f;
    for (int section_n = 0; section_n < 3; section_n++)
        tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal += sections[section_n].Width + sections[section_n].Spacing;

    // Horizontal scrolling buttons
    // (note that TabBarScrollButtons() will alter BarRect.Max.x)
    if ((tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal > tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons)
        && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll))
        if (ImGuiTabItem *scroll_and_select_tab = TabBarScrollingButtons(tab_bar)) {
            scroll_to_tab_id = scroll_and_select_tab->ID;
            if ((scroll_and_select_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) == 0)
                tab_bar->SelectedTabId = scroll_to_tab_id;
        }

    // Shrink widths if full tabs don't fit in their allocated space
    float section_0_w = sections[0].Width + sections[0].Spacing;
    float section_1_w = sections[1].Width + sections[1].Spacing;
    float section_2_w = sections[2].Width + sections[2].Spacing;
    bool central_section_is_visible = (section_0_w + section_2_w) < tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth();
    float width_excess;
    if (central_section_is_visible)
        width_excess = ImMax(section_1_w - (tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - section_0_w - section_2_w), 0.0f); // Excess used to shrink central section
    else
        width_excess = (section_0_w + section_2_w) - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth(); // Excess used to shrink leading/trailing section

    // With ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll policy, we will only shrink leading/trailing if the central section is not visible anymore
    if (width_excess >= 1.0f && ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown) || !central_section_is_visible)) {
        int shrink_data_count = (central_section_is_visible ? sections[1].TabCount : sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount);
        int shrink_data_offset = (central_section_is_visible ? sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount : 0);
        ShrinkWidths(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Data + shrink_data_offset, shrink_data_count, width_excess);

        // Apply shrunk values into tabs and sections
        for (int tab_n = shrink_data_offset; tab_n < shrink_data_offset + shrink_data_count; tab_n++) {
            ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index];
            float shrinked_width = IM_FLOOR(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width);
            if (shrinked_width < 0.0f)
                continue;

            shrinked_width = ImMax(1.0f, shrinked_width);
            int section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab);
            sections[section_n].Width -= (tab->Width - shrinked_width);
            tab->Width = shrinked_width;
        }
    }

    // Layout all active tabs
    int section_tab_index = 0;
    float tab_offset = 0.0f;
    tab_bar->WidthAllTabs = 0.0f;
    for (int section_n = 0; section_n < 3; section_n++) {
        ImGuiTabBarSection *section = &sections[section_n];
        if (section_n == 2)
            tab_offset = ImMin(ImMax(0.0f, tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - section->Width), tab_offset);

        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < section->TabCount; tab_n++) {
            ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[section_tab_index + tab_n];
            tab->Offset = tab_offset;
            tab->NameOffset = -1;
            tab_offset += tab->Width + (tab_n < section->TabCount - 1 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f);
        }
        tab_bar->WidthAllTabs += ImMax(section->Width + section->Spacing, 0.0f);
        tab_offset += section->Spacing;
        section_tab_index += section->TabCount;
    }

    // Clear name buffers
    tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.resize(0);

    // If we have lost the selected tab, select the next most recently active one
    if (found_selected_tab_id == false)
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0 && most_recently_selected_tab != NULL)
        scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = most_recently_selected_tab->ID;

    // Lock in visible tab
    tab_bar->VisibleTabId = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
    tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;

    // Apply request requests
    if (scroll_to_tab_id != 0)
        TabBarScrollToTab(tab_bar, scroll_to_tab_id, sections);
    else if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll) && IsMouseHoveringRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max, true)
             && IsWindowContentHoverable(g.CurrentWindow)) {
        const float wheel = g.IO.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap ? g.IO.MouseWheel : g.IO.MouseWheelH;
        const ImGuiKey wheel_key = g.IO.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap ? ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY : ImGuiKey_MouseWheelX;
        if (TestKeyOwner(wheel_key, tab_bar->ID) && wheel != 0.0f) {
            const float scroll_step = wheel * TabBarCalcScrollableWidth(tab_bar, sections) / 3.0f;
            tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f;
            tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - scroll_step);
        }
        SetKeyOwner(wheel_key, tab_bar->ID);
    }

    // Update scrolling
    tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingAnim);
    tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget);
    if (tab_bar->ScrollingAnim != tab_bar->ScrollingTarget) {
        // Scrolling speed adjust itself so we can always reach our target in 1/3 seconds.
        // Teleport if we are aiming far off the visible line
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, 70.0f * g.FontSize);
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, ImFabs(tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim) / 0.3f);
        const bool teleport = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount) || (tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility > 10.0f * g.FontSize);
        tab_bar->ScrollingAnim =
            teleport ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : ImLinearSweep(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget, g.IO.DeltaTime * tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed);
    } else {
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f;
    }
    tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x + sections[0].Width + sections[0].Spacing;
    tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - sections[2].Width - sections[1].Spacing;

    // Actual layout in host window (we don't do it in BeginTabBar() so as not to waste an extra frame)
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min;
    ItemSize(ImVec2(tab_bar->WidthAllTabs, tab_bar->BarRect.GetHeight()), tab_bar->FramePadding.y);
    window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x + tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal);
}

// Dockable windows uses Name/ID in the global namespace. Non-dockable items use the ID stack.
static ImU32 ImGui::TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, const char *label, ImGuiWindow *docked_window)
{
    IM_ASSERT(docked_window == NULL); // master branch only
    IM_UNUSED(docked_window);
    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) {
        ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(label);
        KeepAliveID(id);
        return id;
    } else {
        ImGuiWindow *window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
        return window->GetID(label);
    }
}

static float ImGui::TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize * 20.0f;
}

ImGuiTabItem *ImGui::TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
{
    if (tab_id != 0)
        for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++)
            if (tab_bar->Tabs[n].ID == tab_id)
                return &tab_bar->Tabs[n];
    return NULL;
}

// Order = visible order, not submission order! (which is tab->BeginOrder)
ImGuiTabItem *ImGui::TabBarFindTabByOrder(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, int order)
{
    if (order < 0 || order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
        return NULL;
    return &tab_bar->Tabs[order];
}

ImGuiTabItem *ImGui::TabBarGetCurrentTab(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar)
{
    if (tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx <= 0 || tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
        return NULL;
    return &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
}

const char *ImGui::TabBarGetTabName(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem *tab)
{
    if (tab->NameOffset == -1)
        return "N/A";
    IM_ASSERT(tab->NameOffset < tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.Size);
    return tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.Data + tab->NameOffset;
}

// The *TabId fields are already set by the docking system _before_ the actual TabItem was created, so we clear them regardless.
void ImGui::TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
{
    if (ImGuiTabItem *tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
        tab_bar->Tabs.erase(tab);
    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab_id) {
        tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0;
    }
    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab_id) {
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
    }
    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab_id) {
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
    }
}

// Called on manual closure attempt
void ImGui::TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem *tab)
{
    if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)
        return; // A button appended with TabItemButton().

    if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument)) {
        // This will remove a frame of lag for selecting another tab on closure.
        // However we don't run it in the case where the 'Unsaved' flag is set, so user gets a chance to fully undo the closure
        tab->WantClose = true;
        if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) {
            tab->LastFrameVisible = -1;
            tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
        }
    } else {
        // Actually select before expecting closure attempt (on an UnsavedDocument tab user is expect to e.g. show a popup)
        if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId != tab->ID)
            TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab);
    }
}

static float ImGui::TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, float scrolling)
{
    scrolling = ImMin(scrolling, tab_bar->WidthAllTabs - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth());
    return ImMax(scrolling, 0.0f);
}

// Note: we may scroll to tab that are not selected! e.g. using keyboard arrow keys
static void ImGui::TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiTabBarSection *sections)
{
    ImGuiTabItem *tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id);
    if (tab == NULL)
        return;
    if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_)
        return;

    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    float margin = g.FontSize
        * 1.0f; // When to scroll to make Tab N+1 visible always make a bit of N visible to suggest more scrolling area (since we don't have a scrollbar)
    int order = TabBarGetTabOrder(tab_bar, tab);

    // Scrolling happens only in the central section (leading/trailing sections are not scrolling)
    float scrollable_width = TabBarCalcScrollableWidth(tab_bar, sections);

    // We make all tabs positions all relative Sections[0].Width to make code simpler
    float tab_x1 = tab->Offset - sections[0].Width + (order > sections[0].TabCount - 1 ? -margin : 0.0f);
    float tab_x2 = tab->Offset - sections[0].Width + tab->Width + (order + 1 < tab_bar->Tabs.Size - sections[2].TabCount ? margin : 1.0f);
    tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f;
    if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget > tab_x1 || (tab_x2 - tab_x1 >= scrollable_width)) {
        // Scroll to the left
        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim - tab_x2, 0.0f);
        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x1;
    } else if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget < tab_x2 - scrollable_width) {
        // Scroll to the right
        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax((tab_x1 - scrollable_width) - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f);
        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x2 - scrollable_width;
    }
}

void ImGui::TabBarQueueFocus(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem *tab)
{
    tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab->ID;
}

void ImGui::TabBarQueueReorder(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem *tab, int offset)
{
    IM_ASSERT(offset != 0);
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
    tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = tab->ID;
    tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset = (ImS16)offset;
}

void ImGui::TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem *src_tab, ImVec2 mouse_pos)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) == 0)
        return;

    const bool is_central_section = (src_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0;
    const float bar_offset = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - (is_central_section ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : 0);

    // Count number of contiguous tabs we are crossing over
    const int dir = (bar_offset + src_tab->Offset) > mouse_pos.x ? -1 : +1;
    const int src_idx = tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(src_tab);
    int dst_idx = src_idx;
    for (int i = src_idx; i >= 0 && i < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; i += dir) {
        // Reordered tabs must share the same section
        const ImGuiTabItem *dst_tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[i];
        if (dst_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder)
            break;
        if ((dst_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) != (src_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_))
            break;
        dst_idx = i;

        // Include spacing after tab, so when mouse cursor is between tabs we would not continue checking further tabs that are not hovered.
        const float x1 = bar_offset + dst_tab->Offset - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        const float x2 = bar_offset + dst_tab->Offset + dst_tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        // GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(ImVec2(x1, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(x2, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255));
        if ((dir < 0 && mouse_pos.x > x1) || (dir > 0 && mouse_pos.x < x2))
            break;
    }

    if (dst_idx != src_idx)
        TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, src_tab, dst_idx - src_idx);
}

bool ImGui::TabBarProcessReorder(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiTabItem *tab1 = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId);
    if (tab1 == NULL || (tab1->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder))
        return false;

    // IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); // <- this may happen when using debug tools
    int tab2_order = TabBarGetTabOrder(tab_bar, tab1) + tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset;
    if (tab2_order < 0 || tab2_order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
        return false;

    // Reordered tabs must share the same section
    // (Note: TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos() also has a similar test but since we allow direct calls to TabBarQueueReorder() we do it here too)
    ImGuiTabItem *tab2 = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab2_order];
    if (tab2->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder)
        return false;
    if ((tab1->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) != (tab2->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_))
        return false;

    ImGuiTabItem item_tmp = *tab1;
    ImGuiTabItem *src_tab = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab1 + 1 : tab2;
    ImGuiTabItem *dst_tab = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab1 : tab2 + 1;
    const int move_count = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset : -tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset;
    memmove(dst_tab, src_tab, move_count * sizeof(ImGuiTabItem));
    *tab2 = item_tmp;

    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings)
        MarkIniSettingsDirty();
    return true;
}

static ImGuiTabItem *ImGui::TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImVec2 arrow_button_size(g.FontSize - 2.0f, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    const float scrolling_buttons_width = arrow_button_size.x * 2.0f;

    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    // window->DrawList->AddRect(ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x,
    // tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));

    int select_dir = 0;
    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;

    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
    const float backup_repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay;
    const float backup_repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = 0.200f;
    float x = ImMax(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width);
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    if (ArrowButtonEx("##<", ImGuiDir_Left, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
        select_dir = -1;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(x + arrow_button_size.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    if (ArrowButtonEx("##>", ImGuiDir_Right, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
        select_dir = +1;
    PopStyleColor(2);
    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = backup_repeat_rate;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = backup_repeat_delay;

    ImGuiTabItem *tab_to_scroll_to = NULL;
    if (select_dir != 0)
        if (ImGuiTabItem *tab_item = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId)) {
            int selected_order = TabBarGetTabOrder(tab_bar, tab_item);
            int target_order = selected_order + select_dir;

            // Skip tab item buttons until another tab item is found or end is reached
            while (tab_to_scroll_to == NULL) {
                // If we are at the end of the list, still scroll to make our tab visible
                tab_to_scroll_to = &tab_bar->Tabs[(target_order >= 0 && target_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? target_order : selected_order];

                // Cross through buttons
                // (even if first/last item is a button, return it so we can update the scroll)
                if (tab_to_scroll_to->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) {
                    target_order += select_dir;
                    selected_order += select_dir;
                    tab_to_scroll_to = (target_order < 0 || target_order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? tab_to_scroll_to : NULL;
                }
            }
        }
    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
    tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x -= scrolling_buttons_width + 1.0f;

    return tab_to_scroll_to;
}

static ImGuiTabItem *ImGui::TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // We use g.Style.FramePadding.y to match the square ArrowButton size
    const float tab_list_popup_button_width = g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y;
    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - g.Style.FramePadding.y, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x += tab_list_popup_button_width;

    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
    bool open = BeginCombo("##v", NULL, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest);
    PopStyleColor(2);

    ImGuiTabItem *tab_to_select = NULL;
    if (open) {
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++) {
            ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
            if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)
                continue;

            const char *tab_name = TabBarGetTabName(tab_bar, tab);
            if (Selectable(tab_name, tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID))
                tab_to_select = tab;
        }
        EndCombo();
    }

    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
    return tab_to_select;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginTabItem()
// - EndTabItem()
// - TabItemButton()
// - TabItemEx() [Internal]
// - SetTabItemClosed()
// - TabItemCalcSize() [Internal]
// - TabItemBackground() [Internal]
// - TabItemLabelAndCloseButton() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::BeginTabItem(const char *label, bool *p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL) {
        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return false;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)); // BeginTabItem() Can't be used with button flags, use TabItemButton() instead!

    bool ret = TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, p_open, flags, NULL);
    if (ret && !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId)) {
        ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
        PushOverrideID(tab->ID); // We already hashed 'label' so push into the ID stack directly instead of doing another hash through PushID(label)
    }
    return ret;
}

void ImGui::EndTabItem()
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL) {
        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= 0);
    ImGuiTabItem *tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
    if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
        PopID();
}

bool ImGui::TabItemButton(const char *label, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL) {
        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return false;
    }
    return TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, NULL, flags | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar, const char *label, bool *p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImGuiWindow *docked_window)
{
    // Layout whole tab bar if not already done
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    if (tab_bar->WantLayout) {
        ImGuiNextItemData backup_next_item_data = g.NextItemData;
        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);
        g.NextItemData = backup_next_item_data;
    }
    ImGuiWindow *window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle &style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label, docked_window);

    // If the user called us with *p_open == false, we early out and don't render.
    // We make a call to ItemAdd() so that attempts to use a contextual popup menu with an implicit ID won't use an older ID.
    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
    if (p_open && !*p_open) {
        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav);
        return false;
    }

    IM_ASSERT(!p_open || !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button));
    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing))
              != (ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing)); // Can't use both Leading and Trailing

    // Store into ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton, also honor ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton passed by user (although not documented)
    if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton)
        p_open = NULL;
    else if (p_open == NULL)
        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton;

    // Acquire tab data
    ImGuiTabItem *tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, id);
    bool tab_is_new = false;
    if (tab == NULL) {
        tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(ImGuiTabItem());
        tab = &tab_bar->Tabs.back();
        tab->ID = id;
        tab_bar->TabsAddedNew = tab_is_new = true;
    }
    tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = (ImS16)tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab);

    // Calculate tab contents size
    ImVec2 size = TabItemCalcSize(label, (p_open != NULL) || (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument));
    tab->RequestedWidth = -1.0f;
    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth)
        size.x = tab->RequestedWidth = g.NextItemData.Width;
    if (tab_is_new)
        tab->Width = ImMax(1.0f, size.x);
    tab->ContentWidth = size.x;
    tab->BeginOrder = tab_bar->TabsActiveCount++;

    const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    const bool tab_bar_focused = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) != 0;
    const bool tab_appearing = (tab->LastFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    const bool tab_just_unsaved = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument);
    const bool is_tab_button = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) != 0;
    tab->LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
    tab->Flags = flags;

    // Append name _WITH_ the zero-terminator
    if (docked_window != NULL) {
        IM_ASSERT(docked_window == NULL); // master branch only
    } else {
        tab->NameOffset = (ImS32)tab_bar->TabsNames.size();
        tab_bar->TabsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1);
    }

    // Update selected tab
    if (!is_tab_button) {
        if (tab_appearing && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs) && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0)
            if (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0)
                TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab); // New tabs gets activated
        if ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected) && (tab_bar->SelectedTabId != id)) // _SetSelected can only be passed on explicit tab bar
            TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab);
    }

    // Lock visibility
    // (Note: tab_contents_visible != tab_selected... because CTRL+TAB operations may preview some tabs without selecting them!)
    bool tab_contents_visible = (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == id);
    if (tab_contents_visible)
        tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = true;

    // On the very first frame of a tab bar we let first tab contents be visible to minimize appearing glitches
    if (!tab_contents_visible && tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar_appearing)
        if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1 && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs))
            tab_contents_visible = true;

    // Note that tab_is_new is not necessarily the same as tab_appearing! When a tab bar stops being submitted
    // and then gets submitted again, the tabs will have 'tab_appearing=true' but 'tab_is_new=false'.
    if (tab_appearing && (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_is_new)) {
        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav);
        if (is_tab_button)
            return false;
        return tab_contents_visible;
    }

    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == id)
        tab->LastFrameSelected = g.FrameCount;

    // Backup current layout position
    const ImVec2 backup_main_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;

    // Layout
    const bool is_central_section = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0;
    size.x = tab->Width;
    if (is_central_section)
        window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(IM_FLOOR(tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim), 0.0f);
    else
        window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(tab->Offset, 0.0f);
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);

    // We don't have CPU clipping primitives to clip the CloseButton (until it becomes a texture), so need to add an extra draw call (temporary in the case of
    // vertical animation)
    const bool want_clip_rect = is_central_section && (bb.Min.x < tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX || bb.Max.x > tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX);
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PushClipRect(ImVec2(ImMax(bb.Min.x, tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX), bb.Min.y - 1), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, bb.Max.y), true);

    ImVec2 backup_cursor_max_pos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
    ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = backup_cursor_max_pos;

    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) {
        if (want_clip_rect)
            PopClipRect();
        window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
        return tab_contents_visible;
    }

    // Click to Select a tab
    // Allow the close button to overlap
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags =
        ((is_tab_button ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap);
    if (g.DragDropActive)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (pressed && !is_tab_button)
        TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab);

    // Drag and drop: re-order tabs
    if (held && !tab_appearing && IsMouseDragging(0)) {
        if (!g.DragDropActive && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)) {
            // While moving a tab it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x
            if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < bb.Min.x) {
                TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(tab_bar, tab, g.IO.MousePos);
            } else if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > bb.Max.x) {
                TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(tab_bar, tab, g.IO.MousePos);
            }
        }
    }

#if 0
    if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > TOOLTIP_DELAY && bb.GetWidth() < tab->ContentWidth)
    {
        // Enlarge tab display when hovering
        bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + IM_FLOOR(ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->ContentWidth, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f)));
        display_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
        TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive));
    }
#endif

    // Render tab shape
    ImDrawList *display_draw_list = window->DrawList;
    const ImU32 tab_col = GetColorU32((held || hovered)          ? ImGuiCol_TabHovered
                                          : tab_contents_visible ? (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive)
                                                                 : (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_Tab : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused));
    TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_col);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);

    // Select with right mouse button. This is so the common idiom for context menu automatically highlight the current widget.
    const bool hovered_unblocked = IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup);
    if (hovered_unblocked && (IsMouseClicked(1) || IsMouseReleased(1)) && !is_tab_button)
        TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab);

    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton)
        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton;

    // Render tab label, process close button
    const ImGuiID close_button_id = p_open ? GetIDWithSeed("#CLOSE", NULL, id) : 0;
    bool just_closed;
    bool text_clipped;
    TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(display_draw_list,
                               bb,
                               tab_just_unsaved ? (flags & ~ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) : flags,
                               tab_bar->FramePadding,
                               label,
                               id,
                               close_button_id,
                               tab_contents_visible,
                               &just_closed,
                               &text_clipped);
    if (just_closed && p_open != NULL) {
        *p_open = false;
        TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, tab);
    }

    // Restore main window position so user can draw there
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PopClipRect();
    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;

    // Tooltip
    // (Won't work over the close button because ItemOverlap systems messes up with HoveredIdTimer-> seems ok)
    // (We test IsItemHovered() to discard e.g. when another item is active or drag and drop over the tab bar, which g.HoveredId ignores)
    // FIXME: This is a mess.
    // FIXME: We may want disabled tab to still display the tooltip?
    if (text_clipped && g.HoveredId == id && !held)
        if (!(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip))
            SetItemTooltip("%.*s", (int)(FindRenderedTextEnd(label) - label), label);

    IM_ASSERT(!is_tab_button || !(tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID && is_tab_button)); // TabItemButton should not be selected
    if (is_tab_button)
        return pressed;
    return tab_contents_visible;
}

// [Public] This is call is 100% optional but it allows to remove some one-frame glitches when a tab has been unexpectedly removed.
// To use it to need to call the function SetTabItemClosed() between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar().
// Tabs closed by the close button will automatically be flagged to avoid this issue.
void ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(const char *label)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    bool is_within_manual_tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar && !(g.CurrentTabBar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
    if (is_within_manual_tab_bar) {
        ImGuiTabBar *tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
        ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label, NULL);
        if (ImGuiTabItem *tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
            tab->WantClose = true; // Will be processed by next call to TabBarLayout()
    }
}

ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(const char *label, bool has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size = ImVec2(label_size.x + g.Style.FramePadding.x, label_size.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    if (has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker)
        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + (g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + g.FontSize); // We use Y intentionally to fit the close button circle.
    else
        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + 1.0f;
    return ImVec2(ImMin(size.x, TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()), size.y);
}

ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(ImGuiWindow *)
{
    IM_ASSERT(0); // This function exists to facilitate merge with 'docking' branch.
    return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
}

void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList *draw_list, const ImRect &bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col)
{
    // While rendering tabs, we trim 1 pixel off the top of our bounding box so they can fit within a regular frame height while looking "detached" from it.
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    const float width = bb.GetWidth();
    IM_UNUSED(flags);
    IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f);
    const float rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) ? g.Style.FrameRounding : g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f));
    const float y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f;
    const float y2 = bb.Max.y - 1.0f;
    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2));
    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9);
    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12);
    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x, y2));
    draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
    if (g.Style.TabBorderSize > 0.0f) {
        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + 0.5f, y2));
        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding + 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 6, 9);
        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding - 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 9, 12);
        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - 0.5f, y2));
        draw_list->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 0, g.Style.TabBorderSize);
    }
}

// Render text label (with custom clipping) + Unsaved Document marker + Close Button logic
// We tend to lock style.FramePadding for a given tab-bar, hence the 'frame_padding' parameter.
void ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList *draw_list,
                                       const ImRect &bb,
                                       ImGuiTabItemFlags flags,
                                       ImVec2 frame_padding,
                                       const char *label,
                                       ImGuiID tab_id,
                                       ImGuiID close_button_id,
                                       bool is_contents_visible,
                                       bool *out_just_closed,
                                       bool *out_text_clipped)
{
    ImGuiContext &g = *GImGui;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    if (out_just_closed)
        *out_just_closed = false;
    if (out_text_clipped)
        *out_text_clipped = false;

    if (bb.GetWidth() <= 1.0f)
        return;

        // In Style V2 we'll have full override of all colors per state (e.g. focused, selected)
        // But right now if you want to alter text color of tabs this is what you need to do.
#if 0
    const float backup_alpha = g.Style.Alpha;
    if (!is_contents_visible)
        g.Style.Alpha *= 0.7f;
#endif

    // Render text label (with clipping + alpha gradient) + unsaved marker
    ImRect text_pixel_clip_bb(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x, bb.Max.y);
    ImRect text_ellipsis_clip_bb = text_pixel_clip_bb;

    // Return clipped state ignoring the close button
    if (out_text_clipped) {
        *out_text_clipped = (text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min.x + label_size.x) > text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x;
        // draw_list->AddCircle(text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, 3.0f, *out_text_clipped ? IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255) : IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
    }

    const float button_sz = g.FontSize;
    const ImVec2 button_pos(ImMax(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x - button_sz), bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y);

    // Close Button & Unsaved Marker
    // We are relying on a subtle and confusing distinction between 'hovered' and 'g.HoveredId' which happens because we are using
    // ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlapMode + SetItemAllowOverlap()
    //  'hovered' will be true when hovering the Tab but NOT when hovering the close button
    //  'g.HoveredId==id' will be true when hovering the Tab including when hovering the close button
    //  'g.ActiveId==close_button_id' will be true when we are holding on the close button, in which case both hovered booleans are false
    bool close_button_pressed = false;
    bool close_button_visible = false;
    if (close_button_id != 0)
        if (is_contents_visible || bb.GetWidth() >= ImMax(button_sz, g.Style.TabMinWidthForCloseButton))
            if (g.HoveredId == tab_id || g.HoveredId == close_button_id || g.ActiveId == tab_id || g.ActiveId == close_button_id)
                close_button_visible = true;
    bool unsaved_marker_visible = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) != 0 && (button_pos.x + button_sz <= bb.Max.x);

    if (close_button_visible) {
        ImGuiLastItemData last_item_backup = g.LastItemData;
        if (CloseButton(close_button_id, button_pos))
            close_button_pressed = true;
        g.LastItemData = last_item_backup;

        // Close with middle mouse button
        if (!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) && IsMouseClicked(2))
            close_button_pressed = true;
    } else if (unsaved_marker_visible) {
        const ImRect bullet_bb(button_pos, button_pos + ImVec2(button_sz, button_sz) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
        RenderBullet(draw_list, bullet_bb.GetCenter(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
    }

    // This is all rather complicated
    // (the main idea is that because the close button only appears on hover, we don't want it to alter the ellipsis position)
    // FIXME: if FramePadding is noticeably large, ellipsis_max_x will be wrong here (e.g. #3497), maybe for consistency that parameter of RenderTextEllipsis()
    // shouldn't exist..
    float ellipsis_max_x = close_button_visible ? text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x : bb.Max.x - 1.0f;
    if (close_button_visible || unsaved_marker_visible) {
        text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= close_button_visible ? (button_sz) : (button_sz * 0.80f);
        text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max.x -= unsaved_marker_visible ? (button_sz * 0.80f) : 0.0f;
        ellipsis_max_x = text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x;
    }
    RenderTextEllipsis(draw_list, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x, ellipsis_max_x, label, NULL, &label_size);

#if 0
    if (!is_contents_visible)
        g.Style.Alpha = backup_alpha;
#endif

    if (out_just_closed)
        *out_just_closed = close_button_pressed;
}

#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE